Dept.

of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

VISION OF THE INSTITUTE

• To be a university globally trusted for technical excellence where

learning and research integrate to sustain society and industry.

MISSION OF THE INSTITUTE

• To offer undergraduate, postgraduate, doctoral and modular programmes in

multi-disciplinary / inter-disciplinary and emerging areas.
• To create a converging learning environment to serve a dynamically evolving
society.
• To promote innovation for sustainable solutions by forging global
collaborations with academia and industry in cutting-edge research.
• To be an intellectual ecosystem where human capabilities can develop
holistically.

VISION OF THE DEPARTMENT

• To excel in education and research in Electronics and Communication

Engineering

MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT

• To educate with the state of art technologies to meet the growing

challenges of the industry.
• To carry out research through constant interaction with research
organizations and industry.
• To equip the students with strong foundations to enable them for continuing
Education.

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 1|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

PEO1 Our Graduates would be successful in Technical and Professional careers
PEO2 Our Graduates would be successful in their post-undergraduate studies at leading
Institutions.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

PO1 To apply the knowledge on Mathematics, Science, and Engineering concepts in
Complex Engineering problems.
PO2 To analyze the complex engineering problems by using the first principles of
Mathematics and Engineering fundamentals.
PO3 To design a component, a system or process to meet the specific needs within realistic
constraints such as economics, environment, ethics, health, safety and
manufacturability.
PO4 To perform investigations, design as well as conduct experiments, analyze and
interpret the results to provide valid conclusions.
PO5 To select and apply appropriate techniques for the design & analysis of systems using
modern CAD tools.
PO6 To offer engineering solutions to societal problems.
PO7 To understand that the solutions have to be provided taking the environmental issues
and sustainability into consideration.
PO8 To understand professional responsibilities and Ethics.
PO9 To function effectively either as a member or a leader in multidisciplinary activities.
PO10 To communicate effectively to both the peers and the others and give as well receive
clear instructions.
PO11 To apply engineering & management principles in their own / team projects in a
multidisciplinary environment.
PO12 To realize the need for lifelong learning and engage them to adopt technological
changes.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

PSO1 To face the challenges in their professional career in industry and government by
integrating the existing and advanced knowledge in Electronics and Communication
engineering to analyze problems and provide solutions.
PSO2 To design cost-effective systems and components for engineering/social applications
by applying appropriate technology in Electronics and Communication engineering
domain.
PSO3 To lead research and transform innovative ideas into reality, establish themselves as
successful professionals and possess technical competency to take up higher studies.

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 2|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

CURRICULUM FRAMEWORK AND CREDIT SYSTEM FOR THE

FOUR-YEAR B.Tech. and 3 Year B.Sc. (Engineering) PROGRAMME

COURSE STRUCTURE

Course Category Courses No. of Credits Weightage (%)

GIR (General Institute 22 56 34.7
Requirements)
PC (Programme Core) 15 52 – 55** 33.1
Programme Elective (PE) / 12$ 36 22.3
Open Elective (OE)
Essential Laboratory 8 16 9.9
Requirements (ELR) Maximum 2 per
session up to 6th
semester
Total 57 160+3 100
Minor (Optional) Courses for 15 15 Additional credits -
credits
Honors (Optional) Courses for 15 15 Additional credits -
credits
1. **A minimum of seven Programme Core, each carrying 4 credits (II, III, IV, V, VI
Semester).
$
2. Out of the 12 elective courses (PE / OE), students must complete at least eight
Programme Electives (PE).
3. For a Minor Degree (MI), students must earn 15 credits in addition to the credit specified
by the departments (160 credits), with the details of the Minor only mentioned on the
transcript, not the degree certificate.
4. To qualify for an Honours Degree (HO), students must: (a) register for at least 12 theory
courses and 2 ELRs in their second year, (b) consistently maintain a minimum CGPA of
8.5 during the first four sessions, (c) maintain a minimum CGPA of 8.5 in all sessions
excluding honours courses, (d) successfully completed additional courses totaling 15
credits (3 numbers of 4 credit course and 1 number of 3 credit course), and (e) achieve
at least a B grade in Honours courses, which must be distinct and at a higher level than
PC and PE courses, preferably M. Tech. courses. Honours courses cannot be treated
as programme electives and grades from these courses do not factor into CGPA
calculations.
5. Project work is compulsory for B. Tech. programme. However, those students wish to
carry out the intern outside the institute (8th semester) can opt for two electives courses
equivalent to 6 credits. But the project work is compulsory for B. Tech. (Honours) degree.

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 3|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

CURRICULUM FRAME WORK / FLEXIBLE CURRICULUM / NEP 2020 / NCrF /

B.Tech.

Semester GIR PC ELR PE/OE Total Credit

Course Credit Course Credit Course Credit Course Credit Credits Distribution
I 8 19 - - - - - - 19 40
II 7 17 1 4 - - - - 21
III 1 4 4 15 2 4 1 3 26 49
IV 1 3 3 10 2 4 2 6 23
V - - 4 14 2 4 2 6 24 47
VI 2 4 3 9 2 4 2 6 23
VII 1 2 - - - - 4 12 14 24
VIII 2 7 - - - - 1 3 10
Total 22 56 15 52 8 16 12 36 160 160

CURRICULUM FRAME WORK / FLEXIBLE CURRICULUM / NEP 2020 / NCrF /

B.Sc. (Engineering) Exit and join back for B. Tech.

Sem GIR PC ELR PE/OE Total Credit

Course Credit Course Credit Course Credit Course Credit Credits Distri-
bution
Same I 8 19 - - - - - - 19 40
as
II 7 17 1 4 - - - - 21
B.Tech.

III 1 4 4 15 2 4 1 3 26 49

IV 1 3 3 10 2 4 2 6 23

B.Sc. V - - 2 8 2 4 2 6 18 34
Exit
VI 4@ 12 - - 2 4 - - 16*

After VII - - 2 6 - - 4 12 18 37
B.Sc.
VIII 1 1 3 9 - - 3 9 19
exit and
join
back
for B.
Tech.
Total 22 56 15 52 8 16 12 36 160 160

@
(Internship (2), Project Work (6), Professional Ethics (3), and Industrial Lecture (1))

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 4|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

B.Tech. Curriculum Structure for the Students admitted during the academic
year 2024 – 2025: The total minimum credits for completing the B.Tech.
programme in Electronics and Communication Engineering is 160+3.

Semester I (July Session)

Code Course Credits Category

ENIR11 Energy and Environmental Engineering 2 GIR
MAIR12 Linear Algebra and Calculus (Mathematics I) 3 GIR
PHIR11 Physics (Circuit) 3 GIR
PHIR12 Physics Lab (Circuit) 2 GIR
CSIR11 Introduction to Computer Programming 3 GIR
(Theory & lab) (Circuit)
MEIR11 Basics of Mechanical Engineering (For CE, EE, EC, 2 GIR
IC & CS)
PRIR11 Engineering Practice 2 GIR
CEIR11 Basics of Civil Engineering (For EE, EC, IC & CS) 2 GIR
Total 19

Semester II (January Session)

Code Course Credits Category

HSIR11 English for Communication (Theory and Lab) 4 GIR
MAIR21 Complex Analysis and Differential Equations 3 GIR
(Mathematics II)
CHIR11 Chemistry (Circuit) 3 GIR
CHIR12 Chemistry Lab (Circuit) 2 GIR
ECIR15 Introduction to Electronics and communication 2 GIR
Engineering
MEIR12 Engineering Graphics 3 GIR
ECPC11 Network Analysis and Synthesis 4 PC
SWIR11 NSS / NCC / NSO 0 GIR
Total 21

Semester III (July Session)

Code Course Credits Category

MAIR33 Real Analysis and Probability Theory (Mathematics III) 4 GIR
ECPC10 Signals and Systems 4 PC
ECPC13 Semiconductor Physics and Devices 4 PC
ECPC12 Electrodynamics and Electromagnetic Waves 4 PC
ECPC14 Digital Circuits and Systems 3 PC
ECLR10 Devices and Networks Laboratory 2 ELR
ECLR11 Digital Electronics Laboratory 2 ELR
Elective – I 3 PE
Total 26

Note: Department(s) to offer Minor (MI) Course and Online Course (OC) to those willing
students in addition to 26 credits.

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 5|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Semester IV (January Session)

Code Course Credits Category
HSIR13 Industrial Economics and Foreign Trades 3 GIR
ECPC15 Digital Signal Processing 4 PC
ECPC16 Transmission Lines and Waveguides 3 PC
ECPC17 Electronic Circuits 3 PC
ECLR12 Electronic Circuits Laboratory 2 ELR
ECLR13 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Laboratory 2 ELR
Elective – II 3 PE
Elective – III 3 PE
Total 23

Note: Department to offer Minor (MI) Course, and ONLINE Course (OC) to those willing
students in addition to 23 credits.
Semester V (July Session) / Continuing B.Tech.
Code Course Credits Category
ECPC18 Analog Communication 3 PC
ECPC19 Digital Communication 4 PC
ECPC20 Antennas and Propagation 3 PC
ECPC21 Analog Integrated Circuits 4 PC
ECLR14 Analog VLSI & Embedded System Design Laboratory 2 ELR
ECLR15 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory 2 ELR
Elective – IV 3 PE/OE
Elective – V 3 PE/OE
Total 24

Semester VI (January Session)

Code Course Credits Category
ECIR19 Industrial Lecture 1 GIR
ECPC22 Wireless Communication 3 PC
ECPC23 VLSI Systems 3 PC
ECPC24 RF and Microwave Engineering 3 PC
ECLR16 Communication Engineering Laboratory 2 ELR
ECLR17 Microwave & Fiber Optic Laboratory 2 ELR
HSIR14 Professional Ethics (Circuit) 3 GIR
Elective - VI 3 PE
Elective - VII 3 PE/OE
Total 23

Semester VII (July Session)

Code Course Credits Category
ECIR16 Summer Internship* 2 GIR
ECIR18 Comprehensive Viva Voce 1 GIR
Elective – VIII 3 PE
Elective – IX 3 PE
Elective – X 3 PE
Elective – XI 3 PE/OE
TOTAL 15
*Evaluation for summer internship

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 6|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Semester VIII (January Session)

Code Course Credits Category

Elective – XII 3 PE
ECIR17 Project Work/ Equivalent no. of Electives 6 GIR
TOTAL 9

Semester I II III IV V VI VII VIII Total

B.Tech. 19 21 26 23 24 23 15 9 160

Note:

a) Curriculum should have 7 Programme Core courses shall be of 4 credits each.

b) Out of 12 elective courses (PE/OE), the students should study at least eight
programme elective courses (PE).
c) Minor (MI): 15 credits over and above the minimum credit as specified by the
departments (160). The details of MINOR will be mentioned in the transcript
and not in the Degree certificate.
d) Honours (HO): 15 credits over and above the minimum credit as specified by
the departments (160).

Specializations in B.Tech. Degree:

After the successful completion of IV year, and earning 160 credits, the student
is eligible for the degree B.Tech. in Electronics and Communication Engineering. The
specialization in the degree is given if the student completes any five program
electives listed in the following table against each specialization.

S. No. B.Tech. in ECE and List of Program Electives (to complete any
Specialization in five)
1. Wireless Networks ECPE10 - Networks and Protocols
ECPE11 - Wireless Local Area Network
ECPE29 - Broadband Access Technologies
ECPE38 - Adhoc Wireless Networks
ECPE39 - Wireless Sensor Networks
ECPE55 - Advanced Topics in 5G/B5G
Wireless Communication
2. Signal Processing ECPE17 - Statistical Theory of
Communication
ECPE18 - Digital Signal Processors and
Applications
ECPE20 - Digital Speech Processing
ECPE21 - Digital Image Processing
ECPE22 - Pattern Recognition
ECPE32 - Digital Signal Processing for
Wireless Communication

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 7|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

3. Artificial Intelligence ECPE49 - Foundations of Artificial

Intelligence
ECPE43 - Computer Vision
ECPE44 - Natural Language Processing
ECPE45 - Optimization Methods in
Machine Learning
ECPE46 - Hardware for Deep Learning
ECPE47 - Image and Video Processing
4. VLSI and Embedded ECPE13 - Computer Architecture and
Systems Organization
ECPE14 - Embedded Systems
ECPE16 - ARM System Architecture
ECPE19 - High Speed System Design
ECPE37 - Low Power VLSI Circuits
ECPE41 - Electronic Design Automation
Tools
ECPE12 - Microprocessors and Micro
Controllers
5. Microwave and Fiber ECPE31 - Fiber Optic Communication
Optic ECPE33 - Microwave Integrated Circuit
Communication Design
ECPE34 - RF MEMS Circuit Design
ECPE36 - Principles of Radar
ECPE42 - Electromagnetic Interference
and Compatibility
ECPE50 - Photonic Integrated Circuits
ECPE51 - Microwave Circuits
6. Semiconductor a) ECPE41 - Electronic Design Automation
Technology Tools
b) ECPE42 - Electromagnetic Interference and
Compatibility
c) ECPE48 - Automated Test Engineering for
Electronics
d) ECPE50 - Photonic Integrated Circuits
e) ECPE51 - Microwave Circuits
f) ECPE56 - Analog Power Integrated Circuits

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 8|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

B.Sc. (Engineering) Curriculum Structure for the Students admitted during the academic
year 2024 – 2025: The total minimum credits for completing the B.Sc. (Engineering)
programme is 120. After B.Sc. (Engineering) exit at year III, a student may join back for
B.Tech.

Semester I (July Session)

Code Course Credits Category
ENIR11 Energy and Environmental Engineering 2 GIR
MAIR12 Linear Algebra and Calculus (Mathematics I) 3 GIR
PHIR11 Physics (Circuit) 3 GIR
PHIR12 Physics Lab (Circuit) 2 GIR
CSIR11 Introduction to Computer Programming 3 GIR
(Theory & lab) (Circuit)
MEIR11 Basics of Mechanical Engineering (For CE, EE, EC, 2 GIR
IC & CS)
PRIR11 Engineering Practice 2 GIR
CEIR11 Basics of Civil Engineering (For EE, EC, IC & CS) 2 GIR
Total 19

Semester II (January Session)

Code Course Credits Category
HSIR11 English for Communication (Theory and Lab) 4 GIR
MAIR21 Complex Analysis and Differential Equations 3 GIR
(Mathematics II)
CHIR11 Chemistry (Circuit) 3 GIR
CHIR12 Chemistry Lab (Circuit) 2 GIR
ECIR15 Introduction to Electronics and communication 2 GIR
Engineering
MEIR12 Engineering Graphics 3 GIR
ECPC11 Network Analysis and Synthesis 4 PC
SWIR11 NSS / NCC / NSO 0 GIR
Total 21

Semester III (July Session)

Code Course Credits Category
MAIR33 Real Analysis and Probability Theory (Mathematics 4 GIR
III)
ECPC10 Signals and Systems 4 PC
ECPC13 Semiconductor Physics and Devices 4 PC
ECPC12 Electrodynamics and Electromagnetic Waves 4 PC
ECPC14 Digital Circuits and Systems 3 PC
ECLR10 Devices and Networks Laboratory 2 ELR
ECLR11 Digital Electronics Laboratory 2 ELR
Elective – I 3 PE
Total 26
Note: Department(s) to offer Minor (MI) Course and Online Course (OC) to those willing
students in addition to 26 credits.

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 9|Page

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Semester IV (January Session)

Code Course Credits Category
HSIR13 Industrial Economics and Foreign Trades 3 GIR
ECPC15 Digital Signal Processing 4 PC
ECPC16 Transmission Lines and Waveguides 3 PC
ECPC17 Electronic Circuits 3 PC
ECLR12 Electronic Circuits Laboratory 2 ELR
ECLR13 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Laboratory 2 ELR
Elective – II 3 PE
Elective – III 3 PE
Total 23

Note: Department to offer Minor (MI) Course, and ONLINE Course (OC) to those willing
students in addition to 23 credits.
Semester V (July Session) / B.Sc. (Engineering) Exit
Code Course Credits Category
ECPC19 Digital Communication 4 PC
ECPC21 Analog Integrated Circuits 4 PC
ECLR14 Analog VLSI & Embedded System Design 2 ELR
Laboratory
ECLR15 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory 2 ELR
Elective – IV 3 PE/OE
Elective – V 3 PE/OE
Total 18

Semester VI (January Session)/ B.Sc. (Engineering) Exit

Code Course Credits Category
ECIR17 Project Work 6 GIR
ECIR16 Winter Internship* 2 GIR
ECIR19 Industrial Lecture 1 GIR
ECLR16 Communication Engineering Laboratory 2 ELR
ECLR17 Microwave & Fiber Optic Laboratory 2 ELR
HSIR14 Professional Ethics (Circuit) 3 GIR
Total 16
*Evaluation for winter internship

Semester VII (July Session)/ Rejoins B.Tech. after B.Sc. (Engineering) exit
Code Course Credits Category
ECPC18 Analog Communication 3 PC
ECPC20 Antennas and Propagation 3 PC
Elective - VI 3 PE/OE
Elective - VII 3 PE
Elective – VIII 3 PE
Elective – IX 3 PE/OE
TOTAL 18

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 10 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Semester VIII (January Session)/ Rejoins B.Tech. after B.Sc. (Engineering) exit

Code Course Credits Category

ECIR18 Comprehensive Viva Voce 1 GIR
ECPC22 Wireless Communication 3 PC
ECPC23 VLSI Systems 3 PC
ECPC24 RF and Microwave Engineering 3 PC
Elective – X 3 PE
Elective – XI 3 PE
Elective – XII 3 PE
TOTAL 19

Credit Distribution
Semester I II III IV V VI VII VIII Total
Credit (B.Sc. (Engg.) Exit) 19 21 26 23 18 16 123
Credit (Rejoin B.Tech. after
19 21 26 23 18 16 18 19 160
B.Sc. (Engg.) Exit)

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 11 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

ELECTIVES CHOICES

Option 1 / Regular B.Tech.

To get a B.Tech. degree in Electronics and Communication Engineering, possible choices

of electives in Programme Electives and Open Electives are,

Program Electives Open Electives Total

8 4 12
9 3 12
10 2 12
11 1 12
12 0 12

Option 2 / B.Sc. (Engineering) Exit (at end of 3rd year)

Program Electives Open Electives Total

3 2 5
4 1 5
5 0 5

Option 3 / B.Tech. with Minor

To get a B.Tech. degree in Electronics and Communication Engineering, and minor in

other programmes, possible choices of electives in Programme Electives, Open Electives
and Minor Electives are,

Program Electives Open Electives Minor Electives Total

8 4 5 12 + 5
9 3 5 12 + 5
10 2 5 12 + 5
11 1 5 12 + 5
12 0 5 12 + 5

Option 4 / B.Tech. with Honours

To get a B.Tech. Honors degree in Electronics and Communication Engineering, possible

choices of electives in Programme Electives, Open Electives, and Honors electives are,

Program Electives Open Electives Honors Electives Total

8 4 4 12 + 4
9 3 4 12 + 4
10 2 4 12 + 4
11 1 4 12 + 4
12 0 4 12 + 4

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 12 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Option 5 / B.Tech. with Honours and Minor

To get a B.Tech. Honors degree in Electronics and Communication Engineering, and

minor in other programmes possible choices of electives in Programme Electives, Open
Electives, and Honors electives are,

Program Open Electives Honors Electives Minor Total

Electives Electives
8 4 4 5 12 + 4 + 5
9 3 4 5 12 + 4 + 5
10 2 4 5 12 + 4 + 5
11 1 4 5 12 + 4 + 5
12 0 4 5 12 + 4 + 5

Note: No Minor or Honours will be awarded for B.Sc. But student can credit minors
and honours during the 6 semesters and redeem it to obtain a minor or honours after
rejoining and completing B.Tech. Also, B.Sc. students shall only do programme
electives in place of their project work in 6th semester.

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 13 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

LIST OF COURSES

(I) GENERAL INSTITUTE REQUIREMENTS (GIR) COURSES:

Sl. Course Number of Max.

No. Courses Credits
1. Mathematics 3 10
2. Physics 1 3
Physics Laboratory 1 2
3. Chemistry 1 3
Chemistry Laboratory 1 2
4. Industrial Economics and Foreign Trade 1 3
5. English for Communication 1 4
6. Energy and Environmental Engineering 1 2
7. Professional Ethics 1 3
8. Engineering Graphics 1 3
9. Engineering Practice 1 2
10. Basic Engineering 2 4
11. Introduction to computer Programming 1 3
12. Branch Specific Course (Introduction to the Branch 1 2
of study)

13. Summer Internship (Winter internship for B.Sc. 1 2

(Engg.))
14. Project work 1 6
15. Comprehensive viva 1 1
16. Industrial Lecture 1 1
17. NSS/NCC/NSO 1 Pass /
Fail
Total 22 56

1. MATHEMATICS:
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. MAIR12 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS 3
2. MAIR21 COMPLEX ANALYSIS AND DIFFERENTIAL 3
EQUATIONS
3. MAIR33 REAL ANALYSIS AND PROBABILITY THEORY 4
Total 10

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 14 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

2. PHYSICS
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. PHIR11 PHYSICS 3
2. PHIR12 PHYSICS LAB 2
Total 5

3. CHEMISTRY
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. CHIR11 CHEMISTRY 3
2. CHIR12 CHEMISTRY LAB 2
Total 5

4. HUMANITIES
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. HSIR13 INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS AND FOREIGN 3
TRADE
Total 3

5. COMMUNICATION
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. HSIR11 ENGLISH FOR COMMUNICATION 4
Total 4

6. ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. ENIR11 ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING 2
Total 2

7. PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. HSIR14 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 3
Total 3

8. ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. MEIR12 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 3
Total 3

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 15 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

9. ENGINEERING PRACTICE
Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. PRIR11 ENGINEERING PRACTICE 2
Total 2

10. BASIC ENGINEERING

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. CEIR11 BASICS OF CIVIL ENGINEERING 2
2. MEIR11 BASICS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 2
Total 4

11. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. CSIR11 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER 3
PROGRAMMING
Total 3

12. BRANCH SPECIFIC COURSE

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. ECIR15 Introduction to Electronics and Communication 2
Engineering
Total 2

13. SUMMER INTERNSHIP

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. ECIR16 INTERNSHIP / INDUSTRIAL TRAINING / 2
ACADEMIC ATTACHMENT (2 to 3 months duration
during summer vacation) (during winter vacation for
B.Sc. (Engg.))
Total 2
The student should undergo industrial training/internship for a minimum period of two months
during the summer vacation of 3rd year. Attachment with an academic institution within the
country (IISc/IITs/NITs/IIITs and CFTIs) or university abroad is also permitted instead of
industrial training.
#
To be evaluated at the beginning of VII semester by assessing the report and seminar
presentations. (beginning of VI semester for B.Sc. (Engg.))

14. PROJECT WORK

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. ECIR17 Project work/equivalent number of electives 6
Total 6
Compulsory for B.Tech. (Honours)

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 16 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

15. COMPREHENSIVE VIVA

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. ECIR18 COMPREHENSIVE VIVA 1
Total 1

16. INDUSTRIAL LECTURE

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. ECIR19 INDUSTRIAL LECTURE 1
Total 1

17. NSS / NCC / NSO

Sl.No. Course Course Title Credits
Code
1. SWIR11 NSS / NCC / NSO 0
Total 0

(II) PROGRAMME CORE (PC)

Sl. Course Course Title Prerequisites Credits

No. Code
1. ECPC10 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS NONE 4
2. ECPC11 NETWORK ANALYSIS AND NONE 4
SYNTHESIS
3. ECPC12 ELECTRODYNAMICS AND NONE 4
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
4. ECPC13 SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND NONE 4
DEVICES
5. ECPC14 DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS NONE 3
6. ECPC15 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING ECPC10 4
7. ECPC16 TRANSMISSION LINES AND ECPC12 3
WAVEGUIDES
8. ECPC17 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS ECPC13 3
9. ECPC18 ANALOG COMMUNICATION ECPC10 3
10. ECPC19 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION ECPC10 4
11. ECPC20 ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION ECPC12 3
12. ECPC21 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS ECPC17 4
13. ECPC22 WIRELESS COMMUNICAITON ECPC19 3
14. ECPC23 VLSI SYSTEMS ECPC21 3
15. ECPC24 RF AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING ECPC16 3
Total: 52

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 17 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

(III) ELECTIVES

a. PROGRAMME ELECTIVES
Sl. Course Course Title Prerequisites Credits
No. Code
1. ECPE10 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS NONE 3
2. ECPE11 WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ECPE10 3
3. ECPE12 MICROPROCESSORS AND ECPC14 3
MICROCONTROLLERS
4. ECPE13 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND NONE 3
ORGANIZATION
5. ECPE14 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS NONE 3
6. ECPE15 OPERATING SYSTEMS NONE 3
7. ECPE16 ARM SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE NONE 3
8. ECPE17 STATISTICAL THEORY OF NONE 3
COMMUNICATION
9. ECPE18 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND ECPC15 3
APPLICATIONS
10. ECPE19 HIGH SPEED SYSTEM DESIGN NONE 3
11. ECPE20 DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING ECPC15 3
12. ECPE21 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING NONE 3
13. ECPE22 PATTERN RECOGNITION NONE 3
14. ECPE23 DISPLAY SYSTEMS ECPC13 3
15. ECPE24 INTERNET OF THINGS CSIR11, ECPE12, 3
C/C++ and Python
Programming
skills
16. ECPE26 COGNITIVE RADIO ECPC15 3
17. ECPE27 MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION ECPC15 3
TECHNOLOGY
18. ECPE28 COMMUNICATION SWITCHING ECPC18 3
SYSTEMS
19. ECPE29 BROADBAND ACCESS ECPC18 & 3
TECHNOLOGIES ECPC19
20. ECPE31 FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION ECPC12 & 3
ECPC18
21. ECPE32 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING FOR ECPC15 3
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
22. ECPE33 MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUIT ECPC16 & 3
DESIGN ECPC24
23. ECPE34 RF MEMS CIRCUIT DESIGN ECPC16 & 3
ECPC24
24. ECPE35 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION ECPC18 3
25. ECPE36 PRINCIPLES OF RADAR ECPC20 3
26. ECPE37 LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS ECPC23 3
27. ECPE38 ADHOC WIRELESS NETWORKS ECPE10 3
28. ECPE39 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS ECPE10 3
29. ECPE40 NANO ELECTRONICS NONE 3
30. ECPE41 ELECTRONIC DESIGN AUTOMATION NONE 3

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 18 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

TOOLS
31. ECPE42 ELECTROMAGNETIC NONE 3
INTERFERENCE AND
COMPATIBILITY
32. ECPE43 COMPUTER VISION NONE 3
33. ECPE44 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING NONE 3
34. ECPE45 OPTIMIZATION METHODS IN NONE 3
MACHINE LEARNING
35. ECPE46 HARDWARE FOR DEEP LEARNING NONE 3
36. ECPE47 IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING NONE 3
37. ECPE48 AUTOMATED TEST ENGINEERING NONE 3
FOR ELECTRONICS
38. ECPE49 FOUNDATIONS OF ARTIFICIAL NONE 3
INTELLIGENCE
39. ECPE50 PHOTONIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS NONE 3
40. ECPE51 MICROWAVE CIRCUITS NONE 3
41. ECPE52 INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE NONE 3
LEARNING
42. ECPE53 DEEP LEARNING NONE 3
43. ECPE54 CONTROL SYSTEMS NONE 3
44. ECPE55 ADVANCED TOPICS IN 5G/B5G NONE 3
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
45. ECPE56 ANALOG POWER INTEGRATED ECPC11, 3
CIRCUITS ECPC17, ECPC21
Total: 135

b. OPEN ELECTIVE (OE)

The courses listed below are offered by the Department of Electronics and
Communication Engineering for students of all Departments.
Sl. Course Course Title Prerequisites Credits
No. Code
1. ECOE10 MICROWAVE INTEGRATED NONE 3
CIRCUITS
2. ECOE11 RF MEMS CIRCUIT NONE 3
3. ECOE12 HIGH SPEED SYSTEM DESIGN NONE 3
4. ECOE13 DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING ECPC15 3
5. ECOE14 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING NONE 3
6. ECOE15 PATTERN RECOGNITION NONE 3
7. ECOE16 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND NONE 3
ORGANIZATION
8. ECOE17 OPERATING SYSTEMS NONE 3
9. ECOE18 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS ECPE10 3
10. ECOE19 ARM SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE NONE 3
11. ECOE20 LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS ECPC23 3
12. ECOE21 COMPUTER VISION AND MACHINE NONE 3
LEARNING

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 19 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

13. ECOE22 TEXT DATA MINING NONE 3

14. ECOE23 INTERNET OF THINGS CSIR11, C/C++, 3
Python
15. ECOE51 NPTEL - Semiconductor Optical NONE 3
Communication Components and
Devices
16. ECOE52 NPTEL - Fundamentals of MIMO ECPC22 3
Wireless Communication
17. ECOE53 NPTEL - Modern Digital ECPC19 3
Communication Techniques
18. ECOE54 NPTEL - VLSI Design Verification ECPC23 3
and Test
19. ECOE55 NPTEL - Digital VLSI Testing ECPC23 3
20. ECOE56 NPTEL - Analog Circuits and ECPC17 3
Systems through SPICE Simulation
21. ECOE57 NPTEL - Linux Programming and NONE 3
Scripting
22. ECOE58 NPTEL - Digital System Design with ECPC14 3
PLDs and FPGAs
23. ECOE59 NPTEL - MEMS and Microsystems NONE 3
24. ECOE60 NPTEL - Neural Networks and NONE 3
Applications
25. ECOE61 NPTEL - Biomedical Signal NONE 3
Processing
26. ECOE62 NPTEL - Evolution of Air Interface NONE 3
Towards 5G
27. ECOE63 NPTEL - Introduction to Machine NONE 3
Learning
28. ECOE64 NPTEL - A Brief Introduction of Micro NONE 3
– Sensors
29. ECOE65 NPTEL - An Introduction to Coding NONE 3
Theory
30. ECOE66 NPTEL - Deep Learning NONE 3
31. ECOE67 NPTEL - Python for everybody NONE 3
32. ECOE68 NPTEL - Cryptography and network NONE 3
security
33. ECOE69 NPTEL - Blockchain architecture NONE 3
design and use cases
34. ECOE70 NPTEL - Optical sensors NONE 3
35. ECOE71 NPTEL - Non -linear adaptive control NONE 3
36. ECOE72 NPTEL - Modelling & simulation of NONE 3
dynamic systems
37. ECOE73 NPTEL - Bio informatics: algorithm & NONE 3
applications
38. ECOE74 NPTEL - ANALOG IC DESIGN NONE 3
39. ECOE75 NPTEL - PETROLEUM ECONOMICS NONE 3

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 20 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

AND MANAGEMENT
40. ECOE76 COMPUTER VISION NONE 3
41. ECOE77 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING NONE 3
42. ECOE78 OPTIMIZATION METHODS IN NONE 3
MACHINE LEARNING
43. ECOE79 HARDWARE FOR DEEP LEARNING NONE 3
44. ECOE80 IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING NONE 3
45. ECOE81 AUTOMATED TEST ENGINEERING NONE 3
FOR ELECTRONICS
46. ECOE82 FOUNDATIONS OF ARTIFICIAL NONE 3
INTELLIGENCE
47. ECOE84 MICROWAVE CIRCUITS NONE 3
48. ECOE85 COMPUTATIONAL NEUROSCIENCE NONE 3
49. ECOE86 VLSI PHYSICAL DESIGN WITH NONE 3
TIMING ANALYSIS
50. ECOE87 AN INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL NONE 3
INTELLIGENCE
Total: 150

c. MINOR (MI) (offered for the students of other departments)

Students of other departments who desire B.Tech. Minor in Electronics and Communication
Engineering can opt to study any 5 of the courses listed below.
Sl. Course Course Title Prerequisites Credits
No. Code
1. ECMI10 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS NONE 3
2. ECMI11 NETWORK ANALYSIS AND NONE 3
SYNTHESIS
3. ECMI12 ELECTRODYNAMICS AND NONE 3
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
4. ECMI13 SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND NONE 3
DEVICES
5. ECMI14 DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS NONE 3
6. ECMI15 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING ECMI10 3
7. ECMI16 TRANSMISSION LINES AND ECMI12 3
WAVEGUIDES
8. ECMI17 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS ECMI13 3
9. ECMI18 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO ECMI14 3
CONTROLLERS
10. ECMI19 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND ECMI15 3
APPLICATIONS
11. ECMI20 ANALOG COMMUNICATION ECMI10 3
12. ECMI21 ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION ECMI12 3
13. ECMI22 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS ECMI17 3
14. ECMI23 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION ECMI20 3
15. ECMI24 MICROWAVE COMPONENTS AND ECMI16 3
CIRCUITS
16. ECMI25 VLSI SYSTEMS ECMI14 3

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 21 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

17. ECMI26 WIRELESS COMMUNICAITON ECMI23 3

18. ECMI27 FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION ECMI12 &ECMI20 3
19. ECMI28 MICROWAVE ELECTRONICS ECMI24 3
Total: 57

(IV) ESSENTIAL PROGRAMME LABORATORY REQUIREMENT (ELR)

Sl. Course Course Title Prerequisites Credits

No. Code
1. ECLR10 DEVICES AND NETWORKS ECPC13 2
LABORATORY
2. ECLR11 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS ECPC14 2
LABORATORY
3. ECLR12 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS ECPC17 2
LABORATORY
4. ECLR13 MICROPROCESSOR AND ECPC14 2
MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY
5. ECLR14 ANALOG VLSI & EMBEDDED ECPC21 & 2
SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY ECPC23
6. ECLR15 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING ECPC15 2
LABORATORY
7. ECLR16 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING ECPC18 & 2
LABORATORY ECPC19
8. ECLR17 MICROWAVE & FIBER OPTIC ECPC24 2
LABORATORY
Total: 16

NOTE: Students can register for 2 laboratory courses during one session along with regular
courses (PC / PE / OE / MI).

(V) ONLINE COURSES (OC)

Sl. Course Course Title Prerequisites Credits

No. Code
Course list shall be updated regularly at the
start of each Academic Year or Semester by
the department NPTEL Coordinator. The
students shall be able to select an online
course from then available list.

VI. ADVANCED LEVEL COURSES FOR B.Tech. (HONOURS)

To qualify for an Honours Degree (HO), students must: (a) register for at least 12
theory courses and 2 ELRs in their second year, (b) consistently maintain a minimum
CGPA of 8.5 during the first four sessions, (c) maintain a minimum CGPA of 8.5 in all
sessions excluding honours courses, (d) successfully completed additional courses
totaling 15 credits (3 numbers of 4 credit course and 1 number of 3 credit course), and

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 22 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

(e) achieve at least a B grade in Honours courses, which must be distinct and at a
higher level than PC and PE courses, preferably M. Tech. courses. Honours courses
cannot be treated as programme electives and grades from these courses do not
factor into CGPA calculations.

Sl. Course Course Title Prerequisites Credits

No. Code
1. ECHO11 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF SIGNALS ECPC15 3
2. ECHO12 DETECTION AND ESTIMATION MAIR45 3
3. ECHO13 WAVELET SIGNAL PROCESSING ECPC15 4
4. ECHO14 RF CIRCUITS NONE 3
5. ECHO15 NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES FOR MIC ECPC16 3
6. ECHO16 APPLIED PHOTONICS NONE 3
7. ECHO17 ADVANCED RADIATION SYSTEMS ECPC20 3
8. ECHO18 BIO MEMS NONE 3
9. ECHO19 ANALOG IC DESIGN ECPC21 3
10. ECHO20 VLSI SYSTEM TESTING ECPC23 3
11. ECHO22 DESIGN OF ASICS NONE 4
12. ECHO23 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN ECPC14 3
13. ECHO24 OPTIMIZATIONS OF DIGITAL SIGNAL ECPC23, ECPE18, 4
PROCESSING STRUCTURES FOR ECPC15
VLSI
14. ECHO26 VLSI DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING ECPC15 3
SYSTEMS &ECPC23
15. ECHO27 ASYNCHRONOUS SYSTEM DESIGN ECPC14 3
16. ECHO28 PHYSICAL DESIGN AUTOMATION NONE 3
17. ECHO29 MIXED - SIGNAL CIRCUIT DESIGN NONE 3
18. ECHO30 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING FOR ECPC15 3
MEDICAL IMAGING
19. ECHO31 Advanced Techniques for Wireless - 4
Reception
20. ECHO32 Error Control Coding - 3
21. ECHO33 Digital Communication Receivers - 3
22. ECHO34 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL ECPC15 3
PROCESSING
Total: 70

(VII) MICROCREDITS (MC) (Students can opt 3 courses of 1 credit (4 weeks) each
as microcredits instead of 1 OE/OC)
Students are advised to take 4-week courses from NPTEL/SWAYAM platform

B.Tech. / Electronics and Communication Engineering 23 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

COURSE OUTCOME AND PROGRAMME OUTCOME MAPPING

PROGRAMME CORE (PC)

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, students will be able to:

Course Course Title CO Course PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Code outcomes
At the end of
the course
student will be
able
ECPC10 SIGNALS AND CO1 Understand the 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SYSTEMS mathematical
description and
representation of
continuous-time
and discrete-time
signals.
CO2 Analyze the 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
spectral
characteristics of
continuous-time
periodic and
aperiodic signals
using Fourier
analysis.
CO3 Analyse system 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
properties based
on impulse
response and
Fourier analysis.
CO4 Convert a 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
continuous time
signal into
discrete time
signal and
reconstruct the

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 26 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

continuous time
signals back from
its samples.
CO5 Apply the Laplace 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
transform and Z-
transform
respectively for
the analyse of
continuous-time
and discrete-time
signals.
ECPC11 NETWORK ANALYSIS CO1 Analyze the 2 2 1
AND SYNTHESIS electric circuit
using network
theorems
CO2 Evaluate 2 2 1
Transient &
Forced response
for RL, RC ,RLS
networks
CO3 Determine 2 2 1
Sinusoidal steady
state response
understand the
real time
applications of
maximum power
transfer theorem
and equalizer
CO4 Understand the 2 2 1
two–port network
parameters, are
able to find out
two-port network
parameters &
overall response
for
interconnection of

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 27 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

two-port
networks.
CO5 Synthesize one 2 2 1
port network
using Foster
form, Cauer form.
ECPC12 ELECTRODYNAMICS CO1 Recognize and 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 1 1 2 3
AND classify the basic
ELECTROMAGNETIC electrostatic
WAVES theorems and
laws and to derive
them
CO2 Discuss the 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 1 1 2 3
behaviour of
electric field in
matter and
polarization
concepts.
CO3 Classify the basic 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
magnetostatic
theorems and
laws and infer the
magnetic
properties of
matter
CO4 Summarize the 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
concept of
electrodynamics
and to derive and
discuss the
Maxwell’s
equations
CO5 Familiarize the 3 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
electromagnetic
wave propagation
and polarization
ECPC13 SEMICONDUCTOR CO1 Apply the 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
PHYSICS AND DEVICES knowledge of

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 28 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

basic
semiconductor
material physics
and understand
fabrication
processes.
CO2 Analyze the 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
characteristics of
various electronic
devices like
diode, transistor
etc.,
CO3 Classify and 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
analyze the
various circuit
configurations of
Transistor and
MOSFETs.
CO4 Illustrate the 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
qualitative
knowledge of
Power electronic
Devices.
CO5 Become Aware 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
of the latest
technological
changes in
Display Devices.
ECPC14 DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND CO1 Apply the 3 2 2 2 3 - - 3 - - 1 1
SYSTEMS knowledge of
Boolean algebra
and simplification
of Boolean
expressions to
deduce optimal
digital circuits.
CO2 Study and 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 3 - - 1 1
examine the SSI,

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 29 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

MSI and
Programmable
combinational
circuits.
CO3 Study and 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 3 - - 1 2
investigate the
sequential
networks using
counters and shift
registers.
CO4 Work out SSI and 1 1 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 - 1 2
MSI digital
networks given a
state diagram
based on Mealy
and Moore
configurations.
summarize the
performance of
logic families with
respect to their
speed, power
consumption,
number of ICs
and cost.
CO5 Design a 1 1 2 3 3 - - 3 - 1 1 2
combinational
and sequential
circuits using
Verilog HDL.
ECPC15 DIGITAL SIGNAL CO1 Analyze discrete- 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PROCESSING time systems in
both time &
transform domain
and also through
pole-zero
placement.
CO2 Analyze discrete- 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 30 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

time signals and

systems using
DFT and FFT.
CO3 Design and 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
implement digital
finite impulse
response (FIR)
filters.
CO4 Design and 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
implement digital
infinite impulse
response (IIR)
filters.
CO5 Understand and 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
develop multirate
digital signal
processing
systems.
ECPC16 TRANSMISSION LINES CO1 Classify the 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
AND WAVEGUIDES Guided Wave
solutions -TE,
TM, and TEM.
CO2 Analyze and 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
design
rectangular
waveguides and
understand the
propagation of
electromagnetic
waves.
CO3 Evaluate the 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
resonance
frequency of
cavity
Resonators and
the associated
modal field.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 31 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

CO4 Analyze the 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3

transmission
lines and their
parameters using
the Smith Chart.
CO5 Apply the 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
knowledge to
understand
various planar
transmission
lines.
ECPC17 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS CO1 To illustrate the 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - -
biasing methods
of transistor and
MOSFET
amplifiers.
CO2 To interpret the 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
concept of single
ended amplifiers.
CO3 To illustrate 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - -
differential
amplifiers and
their
characteristics.
CO4 To construct 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
feedback
amplifiers,
oscillators and
summarize its
performance
parameters.
CO5 To examine the 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - -
concept of
biasing circuits
and band gap
reference circuits
ECPC18 ANALOG CO1 To understand 3 2 2 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
COMMUNICATION the basics of

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 32 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

communication
systems and
amplitude
modulation
techniques
CO2 To apply the 3 3 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
basic knowledge
of signals and
systems and
understand the
concept of
Frequency
modulation
CO3 To apply the 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 3
basic knowledge
of electronic
circuits and
understand the
effect of Noise in
communication
system and noise
performance of
AM system
CO4 To understand 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 3
the effect of noise
on FM system
CO5 To understand 3 3 2 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
TDM and Pulse
Modulation
techniques
ECPC19 DIGITAL CO1 Apply the 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
COMMUNICATION knowledge of
signals and
system and
explain the
conventional
digital
communication

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 33 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

system
CO2 Apply the 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
knowledge of
statistical theory
of communication
and evaluate the
performance of
digital
communication
system in the
presence of noise
CO3 Describe and 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
analyze the
performance of
digital modulation
techniques
CO4 Apply the 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
knowledge of
digital electronics
and describe the
error control
codes like block
code, cyclic code
CO5 Describe and 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
analyze the
digital
communication
system with
spread spectrum
modulation
ECPC20 ANTENNAS AND CO1 Select the 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
PROPAGATION appropriate
portion of
electromagnetic
theory and its
application to
antennas.
CO2 Distinguish the 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 3

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 34 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

receiving
antennas from
transmitting
antennas,
analyze and
justify their
characteristics.
CO3 Assess the need 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
for antenna
arrays and
mathematically
analyze the types
of antenna
arrays.
CO4 Distinguish 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
primary from
secondary
antennas and
analyze their
characteristics by
applying optics
and acoustics
principles.
CO5 Outline the 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 2 3
factors involved in
the propagation
of radio waves
using practical
antennas.
ECPC21 ANALOG INTEGRATED CO1 Infer the DC and 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - -
CIRCUITS AC
characteristics of
operational
amplifiers and
their effect on
output.
CO2 Elucidate and 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
design the linear

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 35 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

and nonlinear
applications of an
op-amp and
special
application ICs.
CO3 Classify and 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - -
identify different
analog filters.
CO4 Classify and 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - -
comprehend the
working principle
of data
converters and
waveform
generators.
CO5 Illustrate the 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
function of PLL
and its
application in
communication
and two stage op-
amp
compensation.
ECPC22 WIRELESS CO1 Describe the 3 2 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3
COMMUNICATION cellular concept
and analyze
capacity
improvement
Techniques
CO2 Mathematically 3 3 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3
analyze mobile
radio propagation
mechanisms.
Summarize
diversity
reception
techniques
CO3 Design Base 3 3 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 36 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Station (BS)
parameters and
analyze the
antenna
configurations
CO4 Analyse and 3 3 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3
examine the
multiple access
techniques and
its application
CO5 Assess the latest 3 3 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3
wireless
technologies
ECPC23 VLSI SYSTEMS CO1 Describe the 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2
techniques used
for VLSI
fabrication,
design of CMOS
logic circuits,
switches and
memory
CO2 Understand and 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2
explain the MOS
transistor
characteristics
and second
order effects
CO3 Analyse and 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2
interpret delay,
power
estimations
combinational
circuit design
CO4 Explain and 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2
compare the
architectures for

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 37 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

FPGA, PAL and

PLDs and
memory design
CO5 Describe the 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2
techniques for
testing and
understand test
principles
ECPC24 RF and Microwave CO1 Apply the basic 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 1
Engineering knowledge of
waveguide and
microwave
resonator circuits.
CO2 Understand the 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 1
methods used for
generation and
amplification of the
microwave power.
CO3 Distinguish 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 1
between the linear
and cross field
electron beam
microwave tubes.
CO4 Learn the basics of 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 1
S parameters and
use them in
describing the
components
CO5 Expose to the 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 1
Microwave
Measurements
Principle
3 - High; 2 - Medium; 1 - Low

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 38 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

ESSENTIAL LABORATORY REQUIREMENT (ELR)

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, students will be able to:

Course Course Title CO Course outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Code At the end of the course
student will be able
ECLR10 DEVICES AND CO1 Demonstrate theoretical 3 3 0 3 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
NETWORKS device/circuit operation in
LABORATORY properly constructed analog
circuits.
CO2 Able to operate standard test 3 3 0 3 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
equipment like multi-meters,
oscilloscopes, power supplies,
waveform generators, and to
analyze, test, and implement
circuits in breadboard.
CO3 Able to analyze the operation of 3 3 0 3 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
an active device and compare
its performance with the
expected performance given in
the data sheets.
CO4 Able to apply troubleshooting 3 3 0 3 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
techniques to test the circuits.
CO5 Able to analyze the circuits and 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0
concepts using the Mini project.
ECLR11 DIGITAL CO1 Demonstrate theoretical
ELECTRONICS device/circuit operation in
3 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
LABORATORY properly constructed digital
circuits.
CO2 Able to correctly operate
standard electronic test
equipment digital multi-meters, 3 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
power supplies to analyze, test,
and implement digital circuits.
CO3 Able to correctly analyze a
circuit and compare its 2 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
theoretical performance to

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 39 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

actual performance.
CO4 Able to apply troubleshooting
techniques to test digital 2 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
circuits.
CO5 Able to code a given digital logic
0 0 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 1 0 0
design in HDL language.
ECLR12 ELECTRONIC CO1 Demonstrate theoretical 3 3 - 2 - 2 - - - 1 - -
CIRCUITS device/circuit operation in
LABORATORY properly constructed analog
circuits
CO2 Able to correctly operate 3 3 - 2 - 2 - - - 1 - -
standard electronic test
equipment digital multi-meters,
power supplies to analyze, test,
and implement digital circuits
CO3 Able to correctly analyze a 3 2 - 2 - 2 - - - 1 - -
circuit and compare its
theoretical performance to
actual performance
CO4 Learn different techniques 3 3 - 2 - 2 - - - 1 - -
employed for the enhancement
of Gain and Bandwidth
CO5 Able to map the Circuits - - - - 3 2 - - - 1 - -
implemented to that of real time
application
ECLR13 MICROPROCESSOR CO1 Train their practical knowledge
AND through - - - 3 5 - - 3 - - 2 2
MICROCONTROLLER laboratory experiments.
LABORATORY CO2 Understand and write the
assembly language programs
- - - 3 5 - - 3 - - 2 2
to
control the systems.
CO3 Learn system-level simulator
and design
- - - 3 5 - - 3 - - 2 2
complete Microcontroller
based modules.
CO4 Study Code Composer Studio
- - - 3 5 - - 3 - - 2 2
to develop and

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 40 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

debug embedded
applications
CO5 Do projects in IoT applications. - - - 3 5 - - 3 - - 2 2
ECLR14 ANALOG VLSI & CO1 Study the characteristics of 3 3 2 1
EMBEDDED SYSTEM negative feedback amplifier.
DESIGN CO2 Design of an instrumentation 3 3 2 1
LABORATORY amplifier.
CO3 Study the characteristics of 3 3 2 1
regenerative feedback system-
Schmitt trigger.
CO4 Design of a second order 3 3 2 1
Butterworth band-pass filter for
the given higher and lower cut-
off frequencies
CO5 Design of a function generator- 3 3 2 1
DSquare, Triangular wave.
CO6 To study, design and 3 3 2 1
experimentally verify
Comparators, Parity
Generators and ALU using
XILINX.
CO7 . Design of Flip-Flops, Shift- 3 3 2 1
Registers & Counters Using
XILINX.
CO8 Design and to study the DC 3 3 2 1
transfer characteristics of an
Inverter using Cadence.
CO9 Able to apply troubleshooting 3 3 2 1
techniques to design, layout,
simulate and test the digital
circuits as blocks.
CO10 Able to map the Circuits 3 3 2 1
implemented to that of real time
application.
ECLR15 DIGITAL SIGNAL CO1 To write MATLAB program for - - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 2 -
PROCESSING signal processing functions
LABORATORY CO2 To implement algorithms to - - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 2 -
realize digital filters and

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 41 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

transforms
CO3 To write and execute - - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 2 -
application program in digital
signal processors
CO4 To implement signal processing - - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 2 -
algorithms in digital signal
processors
CO5 To learn real time interfacing - - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 2 -
and data acquisition of signals
ECLR16 COMMUNICATION CO1 To design analog modulation 3 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
ENGINEERING schemes such as amplitude
LABORATORY modulation and DSBSC
modulation.
CO2 To design analog pulse 3 3 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
modulation schemes by varying
amplitude, position and width of
the pulse signal.
CO3 To perform the digital 3 3 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
modulation by designing
circuits for keying the amplitude
and frequency of the carrier
signal.
CO4 To perform frequency 3 3 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
multiplication using phase
locked loop.
CO5 To study the various 3 3 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
modulation techniques using
Circuit and System level
simulators.

ECLR17 MICROWAVE & CO1 Understand the characteristics 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 1 1

FIBER OPTIC of optical sources and
LABORATORY photodetectors in the fiber optic
communication systems.
CO2 Understand the characteristics 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 1 1
and various propagation effects
of the optical fibers.
CO3 Construct analog and voice 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 1 1

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 42 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

communication through optical

fibers.
CO4 Analyze the performance 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 1 1
parameters of the fiber optic
communication systems
through simulation software.
CO5 Interpret the operating principle 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 1 1
of wavelength division
multiplexing systems.

3 - High; 2 - Medium; 1 - Low

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 43 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

PROGRAMME CORE (PC)

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 27 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC10

Course Title : Signals and Systems
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : -
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students to understand the fundamental characteristics of signals and systems
in terms of time domains.
CLO2 To make the students to understand the fundamental characteristics of signals and systems
in terms of transformed domains.
CLO3 To make the students to develop the mathematical skills to solve convolution problems.
CLO4 To make the students to develop the mathematical skills to solve filtering problems.
CLO5 To make the students to develop the mathematical skills to solve modulation and sampling
problems.

Course Content
Definition of Signals and Systems, Classification of Signals, Operations on signals, Singularity
functions and related functions. Analogy between vectors and signals - orthogonal signal space,
complete set of orthogonal functions, Parseval’s relations. Fourier series representation of continuous
time periodic signals -Trigonometric and Exponential Fourier series- Properties of Fourier series.
Fourier transform of aperiodic signals, standard signals and periodic signals - Properties of Fourier
transforms. Hilbert transform and its properties. Laplace transforms-RoC-properties. Inverse Laplace
transform.
Continuous-time Systems and its properties. Linear time invariant (LTI) system-Impulse response.
Convolution. Analysis of LTI System using Laplace and Fourier transforms.
Sampling and reconstruction of band limited signals. Low pass and band pass sampling theorems.
Aliasing. Anti-aliasing filter. Practical Sampling-aperture effect.
Discrete-time signals and systems. Discrete Fourier series. Z-transform and its properties. Analysis of
LSI systems using Z – transform.

Text Books
1. A.V.Oppenheim, A. Willsky, S. Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems (2/e)”, Pearson 200.
2. S.Haykin and B.VanVeen “Signals and Systems, Wiley, 1998.

References

1. M.Mandal and A.Asif, “Continuous and Discrete Time Signals and Systems, Cambridge, 2007.
2. D.C.Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications (2/e)”, Pearson, 200.
3. S.S.Soliman & M.D.Srinath, “Continuous and Discrete Signals and Systems”, Prentice- Hall,
1990

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 28 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the mathematical description and representation of continuous-time and

discrete-time signals.
CO2 Analyze the spectral characteristics of continuous-time periodic and aperiodic signals using
Fourier analysis.
CO3 Analyse system properties based on impulse response and Fourier analysis.
CO4 Convert a continuous time signal into discrete time signal and reconstruct the continuous
time signals back from its samples.
CO5 Apply the Laplace transform and Z-transform respectively for the analyse of continuous-
time and discrete-time signals.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 29 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC11

Course Title : Network Analysis and Synthesis
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : -
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Electric circuit analysis using network theorems
CLO2 Find the transient and Forced response of RL ,RC and RLC networks
CLO3 Derive the sinusoidal response of RL, RC and RLC network
CLO4 Two port network parameters and interconnection of two port networks
CLO5 RL, RC and LC network synthesis using foster form and cauer form

Course Content
Network concept. Elements and sources. Kirchhoff’s laws. Tellegen’s theorem. Network equilibrium
equations. Node and Mesh method. Source superposition. Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems. Network
graphs.

First and second order networks. State equations. Transient response. Network functions.
Determination of the natural frequencies and mode vectors from network functions.

Sinusoidal steady-state analysis. Maximum power-transfer theorem. Resonance. Equivalent and dual
networks. Design of equalizers.

Two-port network parameters. Interconnection of two port networks. Barlett’s bisection theorem. Image
and Iterative parameters. Design of attenuators.

Two-terminal network synthesis. Properties of Hurwitz polynomial and Positive real function.
Synthesis of LC, RC and RL Networks, Foster Forms and Cauer Forms.

Text Books
1. Hayt W. H., Kemmerly J. E. and Durbin S. M., “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, 6th Ed.,
TataMcGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2008.
2. F.F. Kuo, “Network analysis and Synthesis”, Wiley International Edition, 2008.
References

1. Valkenberg V., “Network Analysis”, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall International Edition, 2007.

2. B.S.Nair and S.R.Deepa, “Network analysis and Synthesis”, Elsevier, 2012.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 analyze the electric circuit using network theorems

CO2 evaluate Transient & Forced response for RL, RC ,RLC networks
CO3 determine Sinusoidal steady state response understand the real time applications of
maximum power transfer theorem and equalizer
CO4 understand the two–port network parameters, are able to find out two-port network
parameters & overall response for interconnection of two-port networks.
CO5 synthesize one port network using Foster form, Cauer form.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 30 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC12

Course Title : ELECTRODYNAMICS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC
WAVES
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the rudiments of Electromagnetic theory and wave propagation
essential for subsequent courses on microwave engineering, antennas and wireless
communication

Course Content

Electrostatics. Coulomb’s law. Gauss’s law and applications. Electric potential. Poisson’s and Laplace
equations. Method of images. Multipole Expansion.

Electrostatic fields in matter. Dielectrics and electric polarization. Capacitors with dielectric substrates.
Linear dielectrics. Force and energy in dielectric systems.

Magneto-statics. Magnetic fields of steady currents. Biot-Savart’s and Ampere’s laws. Magnetic vector
potential. Magnetic properties of matter.

Electrodynamics. Flux rule for motional emf. Faraday’s law. Self and mutual inductances. Maxwell’s
Equations. Electromagnetic Boundary conditions. Poynting theorem.

Electromagnetic wave propagation. Uniform plane waves. Wave polarization. Waves in matter.
Reflection and transmission at boundaries. Propagation in an ionized medium.

Text Books
1. D.J.Griffiths, “Introduction to Electrodynamics (3/e)”, PHI, 2001
2. E.C. Jordan & G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”, PHI, 1995.

References

1. W.H.Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics, (7/e)”, McGraw Hill, 2006.

2. D.K.Cheng, “Field and Wave Electromagnetics, (2/e)”, Addison Wesley, 1999.

3. M.N.O.Sadiku, ”Principles of Electromagnetics, (4/e)”, Oxford University Press, 2011.

4. N.NarayanaRao, “Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, (6/e)”, Pearson, 2006.

5. R.E.Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering (2/e)”, McGraw –Hill, 2002.

6. R.E.Collin, “Antennas and Radio wave Propagation”, McGraw-Hill, 1985.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 31 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 recognize and classify the basic Electrostatic theorems and laws and to derive them.
CO2 discuss the behaviour of Electric fields in matter and Polarization concepts.
CO3 classify the basic Magneto static theorems and laws and infer the magnetic properties of
matter.

CO4 summarize the concepts of electrodynamics &to derive and discuss the Maxwell’s equations.

CO5 students are expected to be familiar with Electromagnetic wave propagation and wave
polarization.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 32 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC13

Course Title : SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND DEVICES
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students understand the fundamentals of electronic devices.

CLO2 To train them to apply these devices in mostly used and important applications

Course Content

Course Content
Semiconductor materials: crystal growth, film formation, lithography, etching and doping. Formation
of energy bands in solids, Concept of hole, Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, conductivity,
Equilibrium Carrier concentration, Density of states and Fermi level, Carrier transport – Drift and
Diffusion, continuity equation, Hall effect and its applications.

P-N junction diodes, Energy band diagram, biasing, V-I characteristics, capacitances. Diode models,
Break down Mechanisms, Rectifiers, Limiting and Clamping Circuits, types of diodes.

BJT Physics and Characteristics modes of operation, Ebers-Moll Model, BJT as a switch and Amplifier,
breakdown mechanisms, Photo devices.

MOSFET: Ideal I-V characteristics, non-ideal I-V effects, MOS Capacitor, MOSFET as switch, CMOS
Logic gate Circuits, Bi-CMOS circuits, CCDs.

State-of-the-art MOS technology: small-geometry effects, FinFETs, Ultrathin body FETs. Display
devices, Operation of LCDs, Plasma, LED and HDTV

Text Books
1. S.M.Sze, Semiconductors Devices, Physics and Technology, (2/e), Wiley, 2002
2. A.S.Sedra & K.C.Smith, Microelectronic Circuits (5/e), Oxford, 2004

References
1. B.G.Streetman: Solid state devices, (4/e), PHI, 1995.
2. Robert Pierret, “Semiconductor Device Fundamentals,” Pearson Education, 2006
3. J.Millman and C.C.Halkias: Electronic devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill, 1976.
4. L.Macdonald & A.C.Lowe, Display Systems, Wiley, 2003
5. N.H.E.Weste, D. Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design (3/e)”, Pearson, 2005.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Apply the knowledge of basic semiconductor material physics and understand fabrication
processes.
CO2 Analyze the characteristics of various electronic devices like diode, transistor etc.
CO3 Classify and analyze the various circuit configurations of Transistor and MOSFETs.
CO4 Illustrate the qualitative knowledge of Power electronic Devices.
CO5 Become Aware of the latest technological changes in Display Devices.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 33 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC14

Course Title : Digital Circuits and Systems
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To enable students to understand Boolean Algebra, Simplification of Boolean expressions

and Logic Gates designs
CLO2 To enable students to design Combinational and Sequential logic circuits and their system
level realizations.
CLO3 To understand the importance of State Machines and design of digital systems using
FSM
CLO4 To enable students to write and simulate digital circuits and systems using Hardware
Descriptive Language

Course Content
Review of number systems-representation-conversions, error detection and error correction. Review of
Boolean algebra- theorems, sum of product and product of sum simplification, canonical forms-min
term and max term, Simplification of Boolean expressions-Karnaugh map, completely and
incompletely specified functions, Implementation of Boolean expressions using universal gates.
Combinational logic circuits- adders, subtractors, BCD adder, ripple carry look ahead adders, parity
generator, decoders, encoders, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, Realization of Boolean expressions- using
decoders-using multiplexers. Memories – ROM- organization, expansion. PROMs. Types of RAMs –
Basic structure, organization, Static and dynamic RAMs, PLDs, PLAs.
Sequential circuits – latches, flip flops, edge triggering, asynchronous inputs. Shift registers, Universal
shift register, applications. Binary counters – Synchronous and asynchronous up/down counters, mod-
N counter, Counters for random sequence.
Synchronous circuit analysis and design: structure and operation, analysis-transition equations, state
tables and state diagrams, Modelling- Moore machine and Mealy machine- serial binary adder,
sequence recogniser, state table reduction, state assignment. Hazard; Overview and comparison of logic
families.
Introduction to Verilog HDL, Structural, Dataflow and behavioural modelling of combinational and
sequential logic circuits.
Text Books
1. Wakerly J F, “Digital Design: Principles and Practices, Prentice-Hall”, 2nd Ed., 2002.
2. D. D. Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

References

1. S.Brown and Z.Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design”, Tata Mc-
Graw Hill, 2008.
2. D.P. Leach, A. P. Malvino, Goutam Guha, “Digital Principles and Applications”, Tata Mc-
Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
3. M. M. Mano, “Digital Design”, 3rd ed., Pearson Education, Delhi, 2003.
4. R.J.Tocci and N.S.Widner, “Digital Systems - Principles& Applications”, PHI, 10th Ed., 2007.
5. Roth C.H., “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishers. V Ed., 2009.
6. T. L. Floyd and Jain,”Digital Fundamentals”, 8th ed., Pearson Education, 2003.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 34 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Apply the knowledge of Boolean algebra and simplification of Boolean expressions to
deduce optimal digital circuits.
CO2 Study and examine the SSI, MSI and Programmable combinational circuits.
CO3 Study and investigate the sequential networks using counters and shift registers.
CO4 Work out SSI and MSI digital networks given a state diagram based on Mealy and Moore
configurations. summarize the performance of logic families with respect to their speed,
power consumption, number of ICs and cost.
CO5 Design a combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 35 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC15

Course Title : DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC10
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To study about discrete-time Fourier transform (DTFT), the concepts of frequency
response characteristics of a discrete-time systems, DFT and its fast computation.

CLO2 To make the students able to design digital filters (FIR and IIR) and implement in
various forms.
CLO3 To study and understand the concept of multirate DSP systems and its applications

Course Content
Review of LSI system, DTFT, Frequency response of discrete time systems, all pass inverse, linear
phase and minimum phase systems.

DFT, Relationship of DFT to other transforms, FFT, DIT and DIF, FFT algorithm, Linear filtering using
DFT and FFT.

Characteristics of FIR Digital Filters, types and frequency response - Design of FIR digital filters using
window techniques and frequency sampling technique - basic structures and lattice structure for FIR
systems.

Analog filter approximations – Butter worth and Chebyshev, Design of IIR Digital filters from analog
filters, Analog and Digital frequency transformations - Basic structures of IIR systems, Transposed
forms.

Sampling rate conversion by an integer and rational factor, Poly phase FIR structures for sampling rate
conversion.

Text Books
1. J.G.Proakis, D.G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing”, (4/e) Pearson, 2007.
2. A.V.Oppenheim & R.W.Schafer, “Discrete Time Signal processing", (2/e), Pearson Education,
2003.
References
1. S.K.Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing (3/e)”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. P.S.R.Diniz, E.A.B.da Silva and S.L.Netto, “Digital Signal Processing”, Cambridge, 2002.
3. E.C.Ifeachor & B.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, (2/e), Pearson Education, 2002.
4. J.R.Jhonson, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice-Hall, 1989.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 analyze discrete-time systems in both time & transform domain and also through pole-zero
placement.
CO2 analyze discrete-time signals and systems using DFT and FFT.
CO3 design and implement digital finite impulse response (FIR) filters.
CO4 design and implement digital infinite impulse response (IIR) filters.
CO5 understand and develop multirate digital signal processing systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 36 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC16

Course Title : TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC12
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose students to the complete fundamentals and essential feature of waveguides,
resonators and microwave components and also able to give an introduction to microwave
integrated circuit design.

Course Content

Classification of guided wave solutions-TE, TM and TEM waves. Field analysis transmission lines.

Rectangular and circular waveguides. Excitation of waveguides. Rectangular and circular cavity
resonators.

Transmission line equations. Voltage and current waves. Solutions for different terminations.
Transmission-line loading.

Impedance transformation and matching. Smith Chart, Quarter-wave and half-wave transformers.
Binomial and T chebeyshev transformers. Single, double and triple stub matching.

Micro-striplines, stripline, slot lines, coplanar waveguide and fin line. Micro strip MIC design aspects.
Computer- aided analysis and synthesis.

Text Books
1. D.M.Pozar, “Microwave Engineering (3/e)” Wiley, 2004.
2. J.D.Ryder, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, PHI, 2003.

References

1. R.E.Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering (2/e)”, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

2. S.Y.Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, (3/e) PHI, 2005.

3. J. A. Seeger, “Microwave Theory, Components, and Devices” Prentice-Hall-A division of

Simon & Schuster Inc Englewood Cliffs, New Jersy 07632, 1986.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 classify the Guided Wave solutions -TE, TM, and TEM.
CO2 analyze and design rectangular waveguides and understand the propagation of
electromagnetic waves.
CO3 evaluate the resonance frequency of cavity Resonators and the associated modal field.
CO4 analyze the transmission lines and their parameters using the Smith Chart.
CO5 apply the knowledge to understand various planar transmission lines.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 37 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC17

Course Title : ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC13
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students understand the fundamentals of electronic circuits

Course Content
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET. Low frequency and high
frequency models of BJT and MOSFET, Small signal Analysis of CE, CS, CD and Cascode
amplifier

Single-ended amplifiers: CS amplifier – with resistive load, diode connected load, current
source load, triode load, source degeneration. CG and CD amplifiers, Cascode amplifier

Frequency response of amplifiers, Differential Amplifiers, CMRR, Differential amplifiers with

active load, two stage amplifiers

Feedback concept, Properties, Feedback amplifiers, Stability analysis, Condition for

oscillation, Sinusoidal oscillators.

Biasing circuits: Current mirrors, Basic current mirror, Cascode current mirror, constant gm
circuits, Introduction to Band-Gap reference circuits.

Textbooks
1. A.S.Sedra & K.C.Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits (5/e)”, Oxford, 2004.
2. D.L.Schilling & C.Belove,” Electronic Circuits: Discrete and Integrated”, (3/e), McGraw
Hill, 1989.
3. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, (2/e), McGraw Hill,
2017.

References
1. J.Millman & Arvin Grabel, “Microelectronics”, McGraw Hill, 2007.
2. Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuits Analysis and Design”, 3/e, McGraw Hill, 2007

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 to illustrate rectifiers, transistor and FET amplifiers and their biasing. Also compare
the performances of its low frequency models
CO2 to interpret and use the concepts of single ended amplifiers
CO3 to discuss the frequency response of MOSFET amplifiers and illustrate about MOS
and BJT differential amplifiers and their characteristics.
CO4 to discuss feedback concepts and construct feedback amplifiers and oscillators.
Also summarizes its performance parameters.
CO5 to identify the concept of biasing circuits and band gap reference circuits

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 38 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC18

Course Title : ANALOG COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC10
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To develop a fundamental understanding of communication systems with
emphasis on amplitude modulation techniques.
CLO2 To get an understanding of communication systems with frequency modulation
techniques.
CLO3 To study the types of noise and its effect on communication systems.
CLO4 To learn the fundamental limitations of communication systems.
CLO5 To learn TDM and pulse analog modulation techniques.

Course Content
Basic blocks of Communication System. Amplitude (Linear) Modulation – AM, DSB-SC, SSB-
SC and VSB-SC. Methods of generation and detection. FDM. Super Heterodyne Receivers.

Angle (Non-Linear) Modulation - Frequency and Phase modulation. Transmission Bandwidth

of FM signals, Methods of generation and detection. FM Stereo Multiplexing.

Noise - Internal and External Noise, Noise Calculation, Noise Figure. Noise in linear and
nonlinear AM receivers, Threshold effect.

Noise in FM receivers, Threshold effect, Capture effect, FM Threshold reduction, Pre-

emphasis and De-emphasis.

Pulse Modulation techniques – Sampling Process, PAM, PWM and PPM concepts, Methods
of generation and detection. TDM. Noise performance.

Textbooks
1. S.Haykins, Communication Systems, Wiley, (4/e), Reprint 2009.
2. Kennedy, Davis, Electronic Communication Systems (4/e), McGraw Hill, Reprint 2008.
References
1. B.Carlson, Introduction to Communication Systems, McGraw-Hill, (4/e), 2009.
2. J.Smith, Modern Communication Circuits (2/e), McGraw Hill, 1997.
3. J.S.Beasley and G.M.Miler, Modern Electronic Communication (9/e), Prentice-Hall,
2008.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 To understand the basics of communication systems and amplitude modulation
techniques.
CO2 To apply the basic knowledge of signals and systems and understand the concept
of Frequency modulation.
CO3 To apply the basic knowledge of electronic circuits and understand the effect of
noise in communication system and noise performance of AM system.
CO4 To understand the effect of noise on FM system.
CO5 To understand TDM and pulse modulation techniques.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 39 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC19

Course Title : DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC10
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To help students understand the key modules of digital communication systems.
CLO2 To expose students to different digital modulation techniques.
CLO3 To get students introduced to the basics of source and channel coding/decoding
CLO4 To get students introduced to the basics of Spread Spectrum Modulation.

Course Content
Base band transmission. Sampling theorem, Pulse code modulation (PCM), DM, Destination
SNR in PCM systems with noise. Matched filter. Nyquist criterion for zero ISI. Optimum
transmit and receive filters. Correlative Coding, M-Ary PAM. Equalization- zero-forcing and
basics of adaptive linear equalizers.

BASK, BFSK, and BPSK- Transmitter, Receiver, Signal space diagram, Error probabilities.

M-Ary PSK, M-Ary FSK, QAM, MSK and GMSK- Optimum detector, Signal constellation, error
probability.

Linear block codes-Encoding and decoding. Cyclic codes – Encoder, Syndrome Calculator.
Convolutional codes – encoding, Viterbi decoding. TCM.

Spread Spectrum (SS) Techniques - Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum modulation,

Frequency-hop Spread Spectrum modulation - Processing gain and jamming margin.

Textbooks
1. S.Haykin, “Communication Systems”, Wiley, (4/e), 2001.
2. J.G.Proakis, “Digital Communication”, Tata McGraw – Hill, (4/e), 2001.

References
1. B.Sklar, “Digital Communications: Fundamentals & Applications”, Pearson Education,
(2/e), 2001.
2. A.B.Carlson, “Communication Systems”, McGraw Hill, 3/e,2002.
3. R.E.Zimer and R.L.Peterson,” Introduction to Digital Communication”, PHI,3/e, 2001.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Apply the knowledge of signals and system and explain the conventional digital
communication system.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of statistical theory of communication and evaluate the
performance of digital communication systems in the presence of noise.
CO3 Describe and analyze the performance of digital modulation techniques.
CO4 Apply the knowledge of digital electronics and describe the error control codes like
block code, cyclic code.
CO5 Describe and analyze the digital communication system with spread spectrum
modulation.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 40 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC20

Course Title : ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC12
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of antenna theory and to analyze and design a
start of art antenna for wireless communications.

Course Content
Radiation fundamentals. Potential theory. Helmholtz integrals. Radiation from a current
element. Basic antenna parameters. Radiation field of an arbitrary current distribution. Small
loop antennas.

Receiving antenna. Reciprocity relations. Receiving cross section, and its relation to gain.
Reception of completely polarized waves. Linear antennas. Current distribution. Radiation
field of a thin dipole. Folded dipole. Feeding methods. Baluns.

Antenna arrays. Array factorization. Array parameters. Broad side and end fire arrays. Yagi-
Uda arrays Log-periodic arrays.

Aperture antennas. Fields as sources of radiation. Horn antennas. Babinet’s principle.

Parabolic reflector antenna. Microstrip antennas.

Wave Propagation: Propagation in free space. Propagation around the earth, surface wave
propagation, structure of the ionosphere, propagation of plane waves in ionized medium,
Determination of critical frequency, MUF. Fading, tropospheric propagation, Super refraction.

Textbooks
1. R.E.Collin, “Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation”, McGraw – Hill, 1985.
2. W.L.Stutzman and G.A.Thiele, “Antenna Theory and Design”, Wiley.
References
1. K.F.Lee, “Principles of Antenna Theory”, Wiley, 1984.
2. F.E. Terman, “Electronic Radio Engineering (4/e)”, McGraw Hill.
3. J.R. James, P. S. Hall, and C. Wood, “Microstrip Antenna Theory and Design”, IEE,
1981.
4. C.A.Balanis, “Modern Antenna Handbook”, Wiley India Pvt. Limited, 2008.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Select the appropriate portion of electromagnetic theory and its application to
antennas.
CO2 Distinguish the receiving antennas from transmitting antennas, analyze and justify
their characteristics.
CO3 Assess the need for antenna arrays and mathematically analyze the types of
antenna arrays.
CO4 Distinguish primary from secondary antennas and analyze their characteristics by
applying optics and acoustics principles.
CO5 Outline the factors involved in the propagation of radio waves using practical
antennas.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 41 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC21

Course Title : ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC17
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce the theoretical & circuit aspects of analog integrated circuits.

Course Content
CMOS differential amplifiers: DC analysis and small signal analysis of differential amplifier
with Restive load, current mirror load and current source load, Input common-mode range.
Operational Amplifiers, DC and AC characteristics, typical op-amp parameters.

Applications of Op-amp: Summing and difference amplifier, Integrators and differentiators, Log
and antilog amplifiers. Instrumentation amplifiers, voltage to current converters. Comparator,
Multivibrators, Schmit trigger, 555 timer and applications.

Active filters: Second order filter transfer function (low pass, high pass, band pass and band
reject), Butterworth and Chebyshev filter. Universal filter, Switched capacitor filter.

Triangular wave generator using OPAMP. RC phase shift and Wien bridge oscillator, Data
converters: A/D and D/A converters: Flash, SAR, Dual-slope, Current Steering DAC,
Introduction to sigma delta ADCs.

Two stage operational amplifiers, Compensation in amplifiers (Dominant pole compensation),

OTAs Vs OPAMP Slew rate, CMRR, PSRR, Introduction to PLL- basic block diagram and its
application.

Textbooks
1. S. Franco, Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits (3/e)
TMH, 2003.
2. Sedra and Smith, Microelectronics Circuits, Oxford Univ. Press, 2004.

References
1. Coughlin, Driscoll, OP-AMPS and Linear Integrated Circuits, Prentice Hall, 2001.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Infer the DC and AC characteristics of operational amplifiers and their effect on
output.
CO2 Elucidate and design the linear and nonlinear applications of an op-amp and special
application ICs.
CO3 Classify and identify different analog filters.
CO4 Classify and comprehend the working principle of data converters and waveform
generators.
CO5 Illustrate the function of PLL and its application in communication and two stage op-
amp compensation.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 42 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC22

Course Title : WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC19
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To get an understanding of mobile radio communication and capacity
enhancement
CLO2 To learn the fundamental limitations on the performance of wireless systems
CLO3 To analyze the parameters for base station design
CLO4 To understand how access methods can accommodate large number of users
CLO5 To study the wide range of wireless systems

Course Content
Introduction to Wireless Communication. Cellular concept. System design fundamentals.
Coverage and Capacity improvement in Cellular system. Technical Challenges.

Mobile Radio Propagation; Reflection, Diffraction, Fading. Multipath propagation. Statistical

characterization of multipath fading. Diversity Techniques.

Path loss prediction over hilly terrain. Practical link budget design using Path loss models.
Design parameters at base station. Antenna location, spacing, heights and configurations.

Multiple access techniques; FDMA, TDMA and CDMA. Spread spectrum. Power control.
WCDMA.CDMA network design. OFDM and MC-CDMA.

GSM.3G, 4G (LTE), NFC systems, WLAN technology. WLL. Hyper LAN. Ad hoc networks.
Bluetooth.

Textbooks
1. T.S.Rappaport, Wireless Communication Principles (2/e), Pearson, 2002.
2. A.F.Molisch, Wireless Communications, Wiley, 2005.
References
1. P.MuthuChidambaraNathan, Wireless Communications, PHI, 2008.
2. W.C.Y.Lee, Mobile Communication Engineering. (2/e), McGraw- Hill, 1998.
3. A.Goldsmith, Wireless Communications, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. S.G.Glisic, Adaptive CDMA, Wiley, 2003.
5. Aditya Jagannatham, “Principles of Modern wireless Communication Systems,
Theory and Practice”, McGraw Hill, 2016.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Describe the cellular concept and analyze capacity improvement Techniques.
CO2 Mathematically analyze mobile radio propagation mechanisms and diversity
reception techniques.
CO3 Design Base Station (BS) parameters and analyze the antenna configurations.
CO4 Analyze and examine the multiple access techniques and their application.
CO5 Assess the latest wireless technologies.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 43 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC23

Course Title : VLSI SYSTEMS
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC21
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce various aspects of VLSI circuits and their design including testing
CLO2 To provide rigorous foundation in MOS and CMOS digital circuits
CLO3 To train the students in transistor budgets, clock speeds and the growing challenges of power
consumption and productivity
CLO4 To introduce the students to memory design techniques and FPGA fundamental concepts

Course Content
VLSI design methodology, VLSI technology- NMOS, CMOS and BICMOS circuit fabrication.
Layout design rules. Stick diagram. Latch up. FINFET Technologies.

Characteristics of MOS and CMOS switches. Implementation of logic circuits using MOS and
CMOS technology, multiplexers and memory, MOS transistors, threshold voltage, MOS device
design equations. MOS models, non-ideal I-V effects, DC transfer characteristics of CMOS
inverter. Switch level RC delay models.

Circuit characterization and performance estimation: Delay estimation, Logical effort and
transistor sizing, Power dissipation. Combinational circuit design: Static CMOS, Ratioed
circuits, Cascode voltage switch logic, Dynamic circuits, Pass transistor circuits.

Programmable logic devices- anti fuse, EPROM and SRAM & DRAM techniques in CMOS.
Programmable logic cells. Programmable inversion and expander logic. An overview of the
features of advanced FPGAs, IP cores, soft core processors.

VLSI testing -need for testing, manufacturing test principles, design strategies for test, chip
level and system level test techniques.

Textbooks
1. N. H. E. Weste, D.F. Harris, “CMOS VLSI design”, (3/e), Pearson, 2005.
2. J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson”, 1997.
3. R.Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India 2005.
References
1. M.M.Vai, “VLSI design”, CRC Press, 2001.
2. Pucknell & Eshraghian, “Basic VLSI Design”, PHI, (3/e), 2003.
3. Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems”, Wiley, 2002.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Describe the techniques used for VLSI fabrication, design of CMOS logic circuits, switches and
memory
CO2 Understand and explain the MOS transistor characteristics and second order effects.
CO3 Analyse and interpret delay, power estimations combinational circuit design
CO4 Explain and compare architectures for FPGA, PAL & PLDs and memory design.
CO5 Describe the techniques for testing and understand test principles.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 44 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPC24

Course Title : RF and Microwave Engineering
Type of Course : PC
Prerequisites : ECPC16
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of microwave electron beam devices and their
applications in X band frequency and introduces the essential Microwave Circuit
Theory and the design aspects of Microwave Integrated Circuit components.

Course Content
Limitations of Conventional tubes, two cavity Klystron Amplifier, Velocity modulation and
Bunching Process, Reflex klystron oscillator –Multi cavity Klystron-Travelling Wave Tube
amplifier- Magnetron Working principle and modes of Operation

Two port Network theory- Scattering Matrix formulation- Passive microwave devices: E and H
junction-hybrid junctions, terminations, bends, corners, attenuators, phase changers,
directional couplers, Circulator, Isolator

Transferred Electron and Avalanche Devices: Gunn Diode, read diode, IMPATT, TRAPATT
and BARIT

Design and Realization of MIC Components: Basics of Micro strip and Strip line – 3 dB Hybrid
Design, Rat Race Coupler, Power Dividers

Microwave Measurements: Introduction to microwave Bench Set-up, Frequency, Wavelength,

VSWR and Impedance Measurement. Network Analyzer, Spectrum analyzer.

Textbooks
1. I.J.Bahl & P.Bhartia, “Microwave Solid state Circuit Design”, Wiley, 2003.
2. S.Y.Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits (3/e)”, PHI, 2005.
3. D.M.Pozar, “Microwave Engineering (2/e)”, Wiley, 2004.

References
1. A. Das, “Microwave Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
2. B.Bhat, S. K. Koul,”Stripline like transmission lines for Microwave Integrated Circuits”,
New age International Pvt.Ltd. Publishers 2007.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Apply the basic knowledge of waveguide and microwave resonator circuits.
CO2 Understand the methods used for generation and amplification of microwave power.
CO3 Distinguish between the linear and cross field electron beam microwave tubes.
CO4 Learn the basics of S parameters and use them in describing the components.
CO5 Expose to the Microwave Measurements Principle.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 45 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

PROGRAMME ELECTIVES (PE)

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 46 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE10

Course Title : NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To familiarize students with the importance of protocol stacks.
CLO2 To learn about two fundamental transports layer protocols and its purpose
CLO3 To know the implementation of host-to-host communication
CLO4 To explore several link layer technologies
CLO5 To understand the theory behind Secured Communication

Course Content
Network Components, Topologies, Network hardware and software, Network Models: OSI
Model & TCP/IP Protocol stack, HTTP FTP, SMTP, POP, SNMP, DNS, Socket programming
with TCP and UDP.

Transport Layer services, UDP, TCP, SCTP, Principles of reliable data transfer, Flow control,
Congestion Control, Quality of Service. Simulation study on Reliable data transfer in TCP.

Network Layer services, Datagram and Virtual circuit service, DHCP, IPV4, IPV6, ICMP,
Unicast routing protocols: DV, LS and Path vector routing, Multicast routing.

Data Link Layer services, Overview of Circuit and Packet switches, ARP, Data link control:
HDLC & PPP, Multiple access protocols, Wireless LAN, Comparison wired and wireless LAN.

Network security threats, Cryptography, Security in the Internet: IP Security & Firewalls,
Multimedia: Streaming stored video/ audio, RTP, Network Troubleshooting.

References
1. J.F.Kurose & K.W.Ross, “Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach featuring the
Internet”, Pearson, 5th edition, 2010.
2. B.A. Forouzan,” Data Communications & Networking”, Tata McGraw- Hill, 4th edition,
2006.
3. W.Stallings, “Data & Computer Communications”, PHI, 9th edition, 2011.
4. W.Stallings, “Cryptography & Network Security”, Pearson, 5th edition, 2011.
5. A.S.Tanenbaum & D.J. Wetherall, “Computer Networks”, Pearson, 5th edition, 2014.
6. Recent literature in Networks and Protocols.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Compare and examine, OSI and TCP/IP protocol stacks Protocols.
CO2 Analyze a network under congestion and propose solutions for reliable data transfer.
CO3 Analyze the need for Internetworking and evaluate Intra and Inter Routing.
CO4 Explore various Link layer technologies.
CO5 Assess the cryptographic techniques, manage a network and propose solutions
under network security threats.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 47 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE11

Course Title : Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN)
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPE10
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose students to wireless local area network standards
CLO2 To expose students to latest PHY layer principles in WLAN
CLO3 To expose students to MAC layer protocols in WLAN
CLO4 To expose students to network entry process in WLAN
CLO5 To introduce students to analyzing real life traces

Course Content
WLAN Introduction and Basics - 802.11 protocol stack basics, RF spectrum of operations, unlicensed
band usage, Types of networks and their usage, Role of Wi-Fi alliance. Exercises: Survey of WLAN
products in consumer appliances.

Evolution of WLAN Layer. The ISM PHYs: FH, DS and HR/DS, basics of OFDM design and parameters
for WLAN, MIMO usage in WLAN, Throughput enhancements, Matlab Simulation of channel models
and studying their characteristics

CSMA/CA principles used for WLAN MAC, Details of MAC protocol, medium reservation and hidden
nodes, MAC Frame Aggregation and QoS in WLAN, Roaming, Throughput calculation.

Network Entry Process in WLAN, Security Evolution, Power save concepts, Throughput and
performance of WLAN, Network tracking operations.

Sniffing WLAN Frames and analysis using open-source tools, inferring capabilities of APs and clients,
analyzing network entry steps and debugging connection problems, Analyzing Data transmission and
debugging performance issues, Analysis of Roaming performance.

References
1. Eldad Perahia and Robert Stacey, Next Generation wireless LANS 802.11n and 802.11ac,
2nd edition, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
2. Mathew Gast, 802.11 Wireless Networks: The Definitive Guide, 2nd Edition, OReily, 2009.
3. Mathew Gast, 802.11n: A Survival Guide: Wi-Fi Above 100 Mbps, OReilly, 2012.
4. Mathew Gast, 802.11ac: A Survival Guide: Wi-Fi at Gigabit and Beyond, OReilly, 2012.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 To understand basics of WLAN systems including standardizing bodies, unlicensed
spectrum ranges, network types.
CO2 Appreciate physical layer challenges and solutions in 802.11 standards and be able to
simulate channel conditions.
CO3 Be able to explain MAC layer steps in WLAN along with the motivation and impacts on
throughput and coexistence
CO4 Trace the steps followed in a typical WLAN network with a clear understanding of security,
power save, and network entry procedures
CO5 Analyze real-life protocol traces under various conditions and correlate with the concepts
learnt in the earlier sections under network security threats.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 48 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE12

Course Title : MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO
CONTROLLERS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC14
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 This subject deals about the basics of 16-bit Microprocessor, 8-bit and 16-bit Micro
controllers, their architectures, internal organization and their functions,
peripherals, and interfacing

Course Content
Microprocessor based personal computer system. Software model of 8086. Segmented
memory operation. Instruction set. Addressing modes. Assembly language programming.
Interrupts. Programming with DOS and BIOS function calls.

Hardware detail of 8086. Bus timing. Minimum Vs Maximum mode of operation. Memory
interface. Parallel and serial data transfer methods. 8255 PPI chip. 8259 Interrupt controller.
8237 DMA controller. Microcontroller. Von-Neumann Vs Harvard architecture. Programming
model. Instruction set of 8051 Microcontroller. Addressing modes. Programming. Timer
operation.

Mixed Signal Microcontroller: MSP430 series. Block diagram. Address space. On-chip
peripherals -analog and digital. Register sets. Addressing Modes. Instruction set.
Programming. FRAM Vs flash for low power and reliability.

Peripheral Interfacing using 8051 and Mixed signal microcontroller. Serial data transfer -
UART, SPI and I2C. Interrupts. I/O ports and port expansion. DAC, ADC, PWM, DC motor,
Stepper motor and LCD interfacing.

Text Book
1. J.L.Antonakos, “An Introduction to the Intel Family of Microprocessors”, Pearson,
1999.
2. M.A.Mazidi & J.C.Mazidi “Microcontroller and Embedded systems using Assembly
& C (2/e)”, Pearson Education, 2007.

References
1. John H. Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, Elsevier Ltd., 2008
2. B.B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors, (7/e), Eastern Economy Edition”, 2006.
3. K.J. Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller “, (3/e), Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004.
4. I. S. MacKenzie and R.C.W.Phan., “The 8051 Microcontroller. (4/e)”, Pearson
education, 2008.
Course Outcomes (CO)
At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Recall and apply the basic concept of digital Fundamentals to Microprocessor based personal
Computer system.
CO2 Illustrate how the different peripherals are interfaced with Microprocessor.
CO3 Distinguish and analyze the properties of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers.
CO4 Understand a low power and reliability concept of mixed signal Microcontrollers.
CO5 Analyze the data transfer information through serial & parallel ports.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 49 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE13

Course Title : COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND
ORGANIZATION
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand how computers are constructed out of a set of functional units and
how the functional units operate, interact, and communicate.
CLO2 To make the students to understand the concept of interfacing memory and
various I/O devices to a computer system using a suitable bus system.

Course Content
Introduction: Function and structure of a computer, Functional components of a Computer,
Interconnection of components, Performance of a computer.

Representation of Instructions: Machine instructions, Memory locations & Addresses,

Operands, addressing modes, Instruction formats, Instruction sets, Instruction set
architectures - CISC and RISC architectures, Super scalar Architectures, Fixed point and
floating-point operations.

Basic Processing Unit: Fundamental concepts, ALU, Control unit, Multiple bus organization,
Hardwired control, Micro programmed control, Pipelining, Data hazards, Instruction hazards,
Influence on instruction sets, Data path and control considerations, Performance
considerations.

Memory organization: Basic concepts, Semiconductor RAM memories, ROM, Speed - Size
and cost, Memory Interfacing circuits, Cache memory, improving cache performance, Memory
management unit, Shared/Distributed Memory, Cache coherency in multiprocessor,
Segmentation, Paging, Concept of virtual memory, Address translation, Secondary storage
devices.

I/O Organization: Accessing I/O devices, Input/output programming, Interrupts, Exception

Handling, DMA, Buses, I/O interfaces- Serial port, Parallel port, PCI bus, SCSI bus, USB bus,
Firewall and Infinity band, I/O peripherals.

Text Book
1. C.Hamacher Z. Vranesic S. Zaky and Manjikian, "Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems", 6 th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. W. Stallings, "Computer Organization and Architecture - Designing for Performance",
8Th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.

References
1. B,Parhami, “Computer Architecture, From Microprocessors to Supercomputers,”
Oxford University Press, Reprint 2014.
2. J. L. Hennessy and D. A. Patterson, "Computer Architecture, A Quantitative
Approach”, 5 th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann,2012.
3. J .P. Hayes, "Computer Architecture and Organization", 3 rd Edition, McGraw-Hill,
1998.
4. Recent literature in Computer Architecture and Organization.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 50 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 apply the basic knowledge of digital concept to the functional components of a
Computer System.
CO2 analyze the addressing mode concepts and design the instruction set Architecture.
CO3 identify the functions of various processing units within the CPU of a Computer
System.
CO4 analyze the function of the memory management unit and create suitable memory
interface to the CPU.
CO5 recognize the need for recent Bus standards and I/O devices.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 51 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE14

Course Title : EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students to understand and program embedded systems using
modern embedded processors.
CLO2 This course describes example embedded platforms, interfaces, peripherals,
processors and operating systems associated with embedded systems, a
comprehensive view of the software frame work being developed around
embedded SOCs.

Course Content
Introduction to Embedded Computing: Characteristics of Embedding Computing Applications, Concept
of Real time Systems, Challenges in Embedded System Design, Design Process. Embedded System
Architecture: Instruction Set Architecture, CISC and RISC instruction set architecture, Basic Embedded
Processor/Microcontroller Architecture (ATOM processor, Introduction to Tiva family etc.)

Designing Embedded Computing Platform: Bus Protocols, Bus Organization, Memory Devices and their
Characteristics, Memory mapped I/O, I/O Devices, I/O mapped I/O, Timers and Counters, Watchdog
Timers, Interrupt Controllers, Interrupt programming, GPIO control, Sensors, Actuators, A/D and D/A
Converters, Need of low power for embedded systems, Mixed Signals Processing.

Programming Embedded Systems: Basic Features of an Operating System, Kernel Features, Real-time
Kernels, Processes and Threads, Context Switching, Scheduling, Shared Memory Communication,
Message-Based Communication, Real-time Memory Management, Dynamic Allocation, Device Drivers,
Real-time Transactions and Files, Real-time OS (VxWorks, RT-Linux, Psos).

Network Based Embedded Applications: Embedded Networking Fundamentals, Layers and Protocols,
Distributed Embedded Architectures, Internet-Enabled Systems, IoT overview and architecture,
Interfacing Protocols (like UART, SPI, I2C, GPIB, FIREWIRE, USB,). Various wireless protocols and its
applications: NFC, Zig Bee, Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy, Wi-Fi. CAN. Overview of wireless sensor
networks and design examples
Case studies: Programming in Embedded C, Embedded system design using Arduino, ATOM
processors, Galileo and Tiva based embedded system applications.

Text Book
1. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components- Principles of Embedded Computing
System Design”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, Second edition, 2008.
2. Barry Crowley, “Modern Embedded Computing”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,
2012.

References
1. Lyla B. Das, “Embedded Systems – An Integrated Approach”, Pearson, 2013.
2. Marwedel Peter, “Embedded System Design, Kluwer Publications, 2004.
3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real time systems”, Mc- Graw Hill, 2010
4. Recent literature in Embedded Systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 52 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 get an insight into the overall landscape and characteristics of embedded systems.
CO2 facilitate a comprehensive understanding of the overall platform architecture of
modern embedded computing systems.
CO3 develop application software for embedded systems using the RTOS functions.
CO4 enable network connectivity of the embedded systems via a combination of wired
and wireless network interfaces.
CO5 design and program embedded systems based on their applications.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 53 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE15

Course Title : OPERATING SYSTEMS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the principles and practice of operating system design and to illustrate
the current design practices using DOS and UNIX operating systems.

Course Content
Types of operating systems, Different views of the operating system, Principles of Design and
Implementation. The process and threads. System programmer’s view of processes,
Operating system's views of processes, Operating system services for process management.
Process scheduling, Schedulers, Scheduling algorithms. Overview of Linux operating system.

Inter process synchronization, Mutual exclusion algorithms, Hardware support, Semaphores,

Concurrent programming using semaphores.

Conditional critical regions, Monitors, Inter process communication: Messages, Pipes.

Deadlocks: Characterization. Prevention. Avoidance .Detection and recovery. Combined
approach to deadlock handling.

Contiguous allocation. Static and dynamic partitioned memory allocation. Segmentation. Non-
contiguous allocation. Paging, Hardware support, Virtual Memory.

Need for files. File abstraction. File naming. File system organization. File system optimization.
Reliability. Security and protection. I/O management and disk scheduling. Recent trends and
developments.

Text Book
1. Gary: Operating Systems- A modern Perspective, (2/e), Addison Wesley, 2000.
2. M. Milenkovic: Operating systems, Concepts and Design, McGraw Hill, 1992.

References
1. C. Crowley: Operating Systems, Irwin, 1997.
2. J.l. Peterson & A.S. Chatz: Operating System Concepts, Addison Wesley, 1985.
3. W. Stallings: Operating Systems, (2/e), Prentice Hall, 1995.
4. Mattuck,A., Introduction to Analysis, Prentice-Hall,1998.
5. Recent literature in Operating Systems.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the different types of Operating systems and scheduling algorithms.
CO2 Understand the synchronization algorithms and semaphores.
CO3 Appreciate the inter process communication and dead lock handling.
CO4 Critically evaluate the different memory allocation techniques.
CO5 Appreciate the importance of file system organization, I/O management and disk
scheduling.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 54 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE16

Course Title : ARM SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The objective of this course is to give the students a thorough exposure to ARM
architecture and make the students to learn the ARM programming & Thumb
programming models.

Course Content
RISC machine. ARM programmer’s model. ARM Instruction Set. Assembly level language
programming. Development tools.

ARM organization. ARM instruction execution. ARM implementation. ARM coprocessor

interface. Flynn's Taxonomy, SIMD and Vector Processors, Vector Floating Point Processor
(VFP), VFP and ARM interactions, vector operation.

Floating point architecture. Expressions. Conditional statements. Loops. Functions and

procedures. Run time environment. Interrupt response. Interrupt processing. Interrupt
Handling schemes, Examples of Interrupt Handlers.

Thumb programmer’s model. Thumb Instruction set. Thumb implementation. AMBA Overview,
Typical AMAB Based Microcontroller, AHB bus features, AHB Bus transfers, APB bus
transfers and APB Bridge.

Memory hierarchy. Architectural support for operating system. Memory size and speed. Cache
memory management. Operating system. ARM processor chips. Features of Raspberry Pi
and its applications.

Text Book
1. S. Furber, “ARM System Architecture”, Addison-Wesley, 1996.
2. Sloss, D.Symes & C.Wright, “ARM system Developer’s Guide-Designing and
Optimizing System Software”, Elsevier.2005.

References
1. Technical reference manual for ARM processor cores, including Cortex, ARM 11,
ARM 9 & ARM 7 processor families.
2. User guides and reference manuals for ARM software development and modelling
tools. David Seal, ARM Architecture Reference Manual, Addison-Wesley.
3. The Definitive Guide to ARM® Cortex®-M3 and Cortex®-M4 Processors, Third
Edition by Joseph Yiu, Elsevier 2015
4. Recent literature in ARM System Architecture.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 55 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 understand the programmer’s model of ARM processor and test the assembly
level programming.
CO2 analyze various types of coprocessors and design suitable co-processor interface
to ARM processor.
CO3 analyze floating point processor architecture and its architectural support for higher
level language.
CO4 become aware of the Thumb mode of operation of ARM.
CO5 identify the architectural support of ARM for operating system and analyze the
function of memory Management unit of ARM.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 56 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE17

Course Title : STATISTICAL THEORY OF COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The subject aims to make the students to understand the statistical theory of
telecommunication, which are the basics to learn analog and digital
telecommunication.

Course Content
Information measure. Discrete entropy. Joint and conditional entropies. Uniquely decipherable
and instantaneous codes. Kraft-McMillan inequality. Noiseless coding theorem. Construction of
optimal codes.

DMC. Mutual information and channel capacity. Shannon’s fundamental theorem. Entropy in
the continuous case. Shannon-Hartley law.

Binary hypothesis testing. Baye’s, mini max and Neyman-Pearson tests. Random parameter
estimation-MMSE, MMAE and MAP estimates. Non-random parameters – ML estimation.

Coherent signal detection in the presence of additive white and non-white Gaussian noise.
Matched filter.

Discrete optimum linear filtering. Orthogonality principle. Spectral factorization. FIR and IIR
Wiener filters.

Text Book
1. R.B.Ash,” Information Theory”, Wiley, 1965.
2. M.D.Srinath, P.K.Rajasekaran & R.Viswanathan, “Statistical Signal Processing with
Applications”, PHI 1999.

References
1. H.V.Poor, “An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation, (2/e)”, Spring
Verlag.1994.
2. M. Mansuripur, “Introduction to Information Theory”, Prentice Hall.1987.
3. J.G.Proakis, D G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing”, (4/e), Pearson Education,
2007.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Show how the information is measured and able to use it for effective coding
CO2 summarize how the channel capacity is computed for various channels.
CO3 use various techniques involved in basic detection and estimation theory to solve
the problem.
CO4 summarize the applications of detection theory in telecommunication.
CO5 summarize the application of estimation theory in telecommunication.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 57 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE18

Course Title : DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND
APPLICATIONS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To give an exposure to the various fixed point and floating-point DSP architectures, to
understand the techniques to interface sensors and I/O circuits and to implement
applications using these processors.

Course Content
Fixed-point DSP architectures. Basic Signal processing system. Need for DSPs. Difference between
DSP and other processor architectures. TMS320C54X, ADSP21XX, DSP56XX architecture details.
Addressing modes. Control and repeat operations. Interrupts. Pipeline operation. Memory Map and
Buses.

Floating-point DSP architectures. TMS320C3X, DSP96XX architectures. Cache architecture. Floating-

point Data formats. On-chip peripherals. Memory Map and Buses.

On-chip peripherals. Hardware details and its programming. Clock generator with PLL. Serial port.
McBSP. Parallel port. DMA. EMIF. I2C. Real-time-clock (RTC). Watchdog timer.

Interfacing. Serial interface- Audio codec. Sensors - Humidity/temperature sensor, flow sensor,
accelerometer, pulse sensor and finger print scanner. A/D and D/A interfaces. Parallel interface-
Memory interface. RF transceiver interface – Wi-Fi and Zigbee modules.

DSP tools and applications. Implementation of Filters, DFT, QPSK Modem, Speech processing. Video
processing, Video encoding/Decoding. Biometrics. Machine Vision. High performance computing
(HPC).

Text Book
1. B. Venkataramani & M. Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processor, Architecture, Programming and
Applications”, (2/e), McGraw- Hill,2010
2. S. Srinivasan & Avtar Singh, “Digital Signal Processing, Implementations using DSP
Microprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54X”, Brooks/Cole, 2004.
References
1. S.M.Kuo & W.S.S.Gan,” Digital Signal Processors: Architectures, Implementations, and
Applications”, Printice Hall, 2004
2. C.Marven & G.Ewers, “A Simple approach to digital signal processing”, Wiley Inter science,
1996.
3. R.A.Haddad & T.W.Parson, “Digital Signal Processing: Theory, Applications and Hardware”,
Computer Science Press NY, 1991.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 learn the architecture details of fixed-point DSPs
CO2 learn the architecture details of floating-point DSPs
CO3 infer about the control instructions, interrupts, pipeline operations, memory and
buses.
CO4 illustrate the features of on-chip peripheral devices and its interfacing with real time
application devices.
CO5 learn to implement the signal processing algorithms and applications in DSPs

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 58 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE19

Course Title : HIGH SPEED SYSTEM DESIGN
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to all aspects of electronic packaging including electrical,
thermal, mechanical and reliability issues.

Course Content
Functions of an Electronic Package, Packaging Hierarchy, IC packaging: MEMS packaging,
consumer electronics packaging, medical electronics packaging, Trends, Challenges, Driving
Forces on Packaging Technology, Materials for Microelectronic packaging, Packaging
Material Properties, Ceramics, Polymers, and Metals in Packaging, Material for high density
interconnect substrates

Overview of Transmission line theory, Clock Distribution, Noise Sources, power Distribution,
signal distribution, EMI; crosstalk and non-ideal effects; signal integrity: impact of packages,
via, traces, connectors; non-ideal return current paths, high frequency power delivery,
simultaneous switching noise; system-level timing analysis and budgeting; methodologies for
design of high-speed buses; radiated emissions and minimizing system noise.

Electrical Anatomy of Systems Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power Distribution,

Electromagnetic Interference, Design Process Electrical Design: Interconnect Capacitance,
Resistance and Inductance fundamentals; Transmission Lines, Clock Distribution, Noise
Sources, power Distribution, signal distribution, EMI, Digital and RF Issues. Processing
Technologies, Thin Film deposition, Patterning, Metal to metal joining.

IC Assembly – Purpose, Requirements, Technologies, Wire bonding, Tape Automated

Bonding, Flip Chip, Wafer Level Packaging, reliability, wafer level burn – in and test. Single
chip packaging: functions, types, materials processes, properties, characteristics, trends.
Multi-chip packaging: types, design, comparison, trends. Passives: discrete, integrated, and
embedded –encapsulation and sealing: fundamentals, requirements, materials, processes

Printed Circuit Board: Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard fabrication, Micro via
Boards. Board Assembly: Surface Mount Technology, Through Hole Technology, Process
Control and Design challenges. Thermal Management, Heat transfer fundamentals, Thermal
conductivity and resistance, Conduction, convection and radiation – Cooling requirements.

Reliability, Basic concepts, Environmental interactions. Thermal mismatch and fatigue –

failures – thermo mechanically induced – electrically induced – chemically induced. Electrical
Testing: System level electrical testing, Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing, Design
for Testability.

Text Book
1. Tummala, Rao R., Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging, McGraw Hill, 2001
2. Howard Johnson, Martin Graham, High Speed Digital Design: A Handbook of Black
Magic, Prentice Hall, 1993

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 59 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

References
1. Blackwell (Ed), The electronic packaging handbook, CRC Press, 2000.
2. Tummala, Rao R, Microelectronics packaging handbook, McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Bosshart, Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology,TataMcGraw Hill, 1988.
4. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, Electronic Product design, Wiley India, 2011
5. R.S.Khandpur, Printed Circuit Board, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005
6. Recent literature in Electronic Packaging.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Design of PCBs which minimize the EMI and operate at higher frequency.
CO2 Enable design of packages which can withstand higher temperature, vibrations and
shock.
CO3 Explain the basic techniques for statistical process control and failure mode and
effect analysis.
CO4 Prescribe and perform parametric test and analysis and the troubleshooting of
electronic circuits with the application of basic and virtual electronic instruments.
CO5 Explain contemporary pragmatic manufacturing processes, interconnects and
assembly methods for electronic equipment fabrication.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 60 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE20

Course Title : DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The purpose of this course is to explain how DSP techniques could be used for
solving problems in speech communication.

Course Content
Speech production model-1D sound waves-functional block of the Vocal tract model –Linear
predictive co- efficient (LPC) -Auto-correlation method-Levinson-Durbin Algorithm-Auto-co-
variance method-Lattice Structure-Computation of Lattice co-efficient from LPC-Phonetic
Representation of speech-Perception of Loudness - Critical bands – Pitch perception –
Auditory masking.

Feature extraction of the speech signal: Endpoint Detection-Dynamic time warping- Pitch
frequency estimation: Autocorrelation approach- Homomorphic Approach-Formant frequency
estimation using vocal tract model and Homomorphic Approach-Linear predictive co-efficient
-Poles of the vocal tract-Reflection co-efficient-Log Area ratio.

Cepstrum- Line spectral frequencies- Functional blocks of the ear- Mel frequency cepstral co-
efficient- Spectrogram-Time resolution versus frequency resolution-Discrete wavelet
transformation.

Pattern recognition for speech detection: Back-propagation Neural Network-Support Vector

Machine- Hidden Markov Model (HMM)-Gaussian Mixture Model (GMM) -Unsupervised
Learning system: K-Means and Fuzzy K-means clustering - Kohonen self-organizing map-
Dimensionality reduction techniques: Principle component analysis (PCA), Linear discriminate
analysis (LDA), Kernel-LDA (KLDA), Independent component analysis (ICA).

Non-uniform quantization for Gaussian distributed data- Adaptive Quantization-Differential

pulse code modulation- Code Exited Linear prediction (CELP)-Quality assessment of the
compressed speech signal Text to Speech (TTS) analysis –Evolution of speech synthesis
systems-Unit selection methods - TTS Applications.

Text Book
1. L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schafer,” Introduction to Digital speech processing”, now
publishers USA,2007
2. E.S.Gopi,”Digital speech processing using matlab”, Springer, 2014.

References
1. L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schafer,”Digital processing of speech signals”,
PrenticeHall,1978
2. T.F.Quatieri, ”Discrete-time Speech Signal Processing”, Prentice-Hall, PTR,2001
3. L.Hanzaetal, “Voice Compression and Communications”, Wiley/ IEEE, 2001.
4. Recent literature in Digital speech processing.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 61 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 illustrate how the speech production is modeled
CO2 summarize the various techniques involved in collecting the features from the
speech signal in both time and frequency domain
CO3 summarize the functional blocks of the ear
CO4 compare the various pattern recognition techniques involved in speech and speaker
detection
CO5 summarize the various speech compression techniques

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 62 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE21

Course Title : DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To treat the 2D systems as an extension of 1D system design and discuss
techniques specific to 2D systems.

Course Content
Linearity and space-invariance. PSF, Discrete images and image transforms, 2-D sampling
and reconstruction, Image quantization, 2-D transforms and properties.

Image enhancement- Histogram modeling, equalization and modification. Image smoothing,

Image crispening. Spatial filtering, Replication and zooming, Generalized cepstrum and
homomorphic filtering.

Image restoration- image observation models. Inverse and Wiener filtering. Filtering using
image transforms. Constrained least-squares restoration. Generalized inverse, SVD and
interactive methods. Recursive filtering. Maximum entropy restoration. Bayesian methods.

Image data compression- sub sampling, coarse quantization and frame repetition. Pixel coding
- PCM, entropy coding, run length coding Bit-plane coding. Predictive coding. Transform
coding of images. Hybrid coding and vector DPCM. Inter-frame hybrid coding.

Image analysis- applications, Spatial and transform features. Edge detection, boundary
extraction, AR models and region representation. Moments as features. Image structure.
Morphological operations and transforms. Texture. Scene matching and detection.
Segmentation and classification.

Text Book
1. A.K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI, 1995.
2. R.C.Gonzalez & R.E. Woods,” Digital Image Processing”, (2/e), Pearson, 2002.

References
1. J.C. Russ, “The Image Processing Handbook”, (5/e), CRC, 2006.
2. E.S.Gopi, ''Digital Image processing using Matlab'', Scitech publications, 2006.
3. Recent literature in Digital Image processing

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 analyze the need for image transforms, types and their properties.
CO2 become skilled at different techniques employed for the enhancement of images
both in spatial and frequency domain
CO3 explore causes for image degradation and to teach various restoration techniques.
CO4 evaluate the image compression techniques in spatial and frequency domain.
CO5 gain knowledge of feature extraction techniques for image analysis and recognition.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 63 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE22

Course Title : PATTERN RECOGNITION
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The subject aims to make the students to understand the mathematical approach
for pattern recognition.

Course Content
Polynomial curve fitting – The curse of dimensionality - Decision theory - Information theory -
The beta distribution - Dirichlet distribution-Gaussian distribution-The exponent family:
Maximum likelihood and sufficient statistics -non-parametric method: kernel-density
estimators - Nearest Neighbour methods.

Linear models for regression and classification: Linear basis function models for regression -
Bias variance decomposition-Bayesian linear regression-Discriminant functions - Fisher’s
linear discriminant analysis (LDA) - Principal Component Analysis (PCA) - Probabilistic
generative model - Probabilistic discriminative model.

Kernel methods: Dual Representations-Constructing Kernels-Radial basis function networks-

Gaussian Process-Maximum margin classifier (Support Vector Machine) –Relevance Vector
Machines-Kernel-PCA, Kernel-LDA.

Mixture models: K-means clustering - Mixtures of Gaussian - Expectation-Maximization

algorithm- Sequential models: Markov model, Hidden-Markov Model (HMM) - Linear
Dynamical Systems (LDS).

Neural networks: Feed- forward Network functions functions-Network training - Error Back
propagation - The Hessian Matrix - Regularization in Neural Network - Mixture density
networks – Bayesian Neural Networks

Text Book
1. C.M.Bishop,''Pattern recognition and machine learning'', Springer,2006
2. E.S.Gopi, “Pattern recognition and Computational intelligence using Matlab,
Transactions on computational science and computational intelligence, Springer,
2019

References
1. Sergious Thedorodis ,Konstantinos Koutroumbas, Pattern recognition, Elsevier,
Fourth edition,2009
2. Richard O.Duda, Peter.E.Hart, David G.Stork, “Pattern classification”, Wiley, Second
edition,2016
3. Recent literature in the related topics

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 64 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 summarize the various techniques involved in pattern recognition
CO2 identify the suitable pattern recognition techniques for the particular applications.
CO3 categorize the various pattern recognition techniques into supervised and
unsupervised.
CO4 summarize the mixture models-based pattern recognition techniques
CO5 summarize the artificial neural network-based pattern recognition techniques

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 65 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE23

Course Title : DISPLAY SYSTEMS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC13
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the basics of the display systems and to illustrate the
current design practices of the display systems.

Course Content
Introduction to displays. Requirements of displays. Display technologies, CRT, Flat panel and
advanced display technologies. Technical issues in displays.

Head mounted displays. Displays less than and greater than 0.5 m diagonal. Low power and
light emitting displays.

Operation of TFTs and MIMS. LCDs, Brightness. Types of LCD displays.

Emissive displays, ACTFEL, Plasma display and Field emission displays, operating principle
and performance.

Types of Displays: 3D, HDTV, LED, Touch screen.

Text Book
1. L.W. Mackonald & A.C. Lowe, Display Systems, Design and Applications, Wiley,
2003.
2. E.H. Stupp &M. S. Brennesholtz, Projection Displays, Wiley,1999

References
1. Peter A. Keller, Electronic Display Measurement: Concepts, Techniques, and
Instrumentation, Wiley-Inter science, 1997.
2. Recent literature in Display Systems.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 appreciate the technical requirement of different types of displays systems
CO2 analyze the various low power lighting systems
CO3 understand the operation of TFTs and LCD displays.
CO4 analyze the various kinds of emissive displays
CO5 critically evaluate the recent advancements in the display device technology.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 66 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE24

Course Title : INTERNET OF THINGS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : CSIR11, ECPE12, C/C++ and Python Programming
skills
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand basics of an IOT System, IoT sensors, IoT hardware and
communication protocols, data storage, data analysis and use them for real time
IoT enabled domains.

Course Content
Introduction to IoT and IoT levels : Functional blocks of an IoT system (Sensors, Data
Ingress, Data Aggregation Point Communication point back to the cloud, Analysis, Decision
making, Actuation) Basic of Physical and logical design of IoT (IoT protocols, communication
models) IoT enabled domains (Home automation, Smart cities, environment monitoring,
renewable energy, agriculture, industry, healthcare, marketing and management) M2M,
Difference between IoT, Embedded Systems and M2M, Industry 4.0 concepts.

IoT sensors and hardware : Passive and active sensors, differences, Different kinds of
sensors (Temperature, humidity, pressure, obstacle, water flow, accelerometer, color, gyro,
load cell, finger print, motion, ultrasonic distance, magnetic vibration, eye blink, hear beat,
PPG, glucose, body position, blood pressure), Multi-sensors, Pre-processing (sampling,
filtering, ADC, size of data, local memory, compression), IoT front end hardware (Raspberry
Pi, Arduino, Galileo, beagle bone equivalent platforms)

Introduction to IoT protocols: Infrastructure (6LowPAN, IPv4/IPv6, RPL), Identification (EPC,

uCode, IPv6, URIs), Communication/ Transport (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, ZigBee, LPWAN), Data
Protocols (MQTT, CoAP, AMQP, WebSocket, Node)

IoT Cloud and data analytics: Collecting data from sensors, Data Ingress, Cloud storage, IoT
cloud platforms (Amazon AWS, Microsoft Azure, Google APIs), Data analytics for IoT,
Software and management tool for IoT, Dashboard design

IoT architectures with case studies: Business models for IoT, smart cities, agriculture,
healthcare, industry. Case studies/Mini projects for the real time IoT applications.

Text Book
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”,
Universities Press, 2015.

References
1. Raj kamal, Internet of Things, Architecture and Design Principles, McGraw-Hill, 2017
2. Manoel Carlos Ramon, “Intel® Galileo and Intel® Galileo Gen 2: API Features and
Arduino Projects for Linux Programmers”, Apress, 2014.H. Gerez, “Algorithms for
VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley, 1999.
3. Marco Schwartz, “Internet of Things with the Arduino Yun”, Packt Publishing, 2014.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 67 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 understand basic premise of an IOT System
CO2 be familiar with the sensors available for IoT applications
CO3 learn the front-end hardware platforms and communication protocols for IoT.
CO4 understand cloud storage, data analysis and management
CO5 usage for real time IoT enabled domains

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 68 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE26

Course Title : COGNITIVE RADIO
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 This subject introduces the fundamentals of multi rate signal processing and
cognitive radio.

Course Content
Filter banks-uniform filter bank. Direct and DFT approaches. Introduction to ADSL Modem.
Discrete multi-tone modulation and its realization using DFT.QMF. STFT. Computation of
DWT using filter banks.

DDFS- ROM LUT approach. Spurious signals, jitter. Computation of special functions using
CORDIC. Vector and rotation mode of CORDIC. CORDIC architectures.

Block diagram of a software radio. Digital down converters and demodulators Universal
modulator and demodulator using CORDIC. Incoherent demodulation - digital approach for I
and Q generation, special sampling schemes. CIC filters. Residue number system and high-
speed filters using RNS. Down conversion using discrete Hilbert transform. Under sampling
receivers, Coherent demodulation schemes.

Concept of Cognitive Radio, Benefits of Using SDR, Problems Faced by SDR, Cognitive
Networks, Cognitive Radio Architecture. Cognitive Radio Design, Cognitive Engine Design,

A Basic OFDM System Model, OFDM based cognitive radio, Cognitive OFDM Systems, MIMO
channel estimation, Multi-band OFDM, MIMO-OFDM synchronization and frequency offset
estimation. Spectrum sensing to detect Specific Primary System, Spectrum Sensing for
Cognitive OFDMA Systems.

Text Book
1. J. H. Reed, “Software Radio”, Pearson, 2002.
2. U. Meyer – Baese, “Digital Signal Processing with FPGAs”, Springer, 2004.
References
1. H. Arslan “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio and Adaptive Wireless
Systems”, University of South Florida, USA, Springer, 2007.
2. S. K. Mitra, “Digital Signal processing”, McGrawHill,1998
3. K.C.Chen, R.Prasad, “Cognitive Radio Networks”, Wiley, 2009-06-15.
4. T.W.Rondeau, C.W.Bostian, “Artificial Intelligence in Wireless
Communications”,2009.
5. Tusi, “Digital Techniques for Wideband receivers”, Artech House, 2001.
6. T. DarcChiueh, P. Yun Tsai,” OFDM baseband receiver design for wireless
communications”, Wiley,2007
7. Recent literature in Cognitive Radio

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 69 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 gain knowledge on multi-rate systems.
CO2 develop ability to analyze, design, and implement any application using FPGA.
CO3 be aware of how signal processing concepts can be used for efficient FPGA based
system design.
CO4 understand the rapid advances in Cognitive radio technologies.
CO5 explore DDFS, CORDIC and its application.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 70 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE27

Course Title : MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To made the students to understand various encoding and decoding techniques
of audios and videos in multimedia systems

Course Content
Components of multimedia system, Desirable features, Applications of multimedia systems,
Introduction to different types, Multimedia storage device.

Digital audio representation and processing-time domain and transform domain

representations. Coding standards, transmission and processing of digital audio. Musical
instrument synthesizers.

Still image coding-JPEG. Discrete cosine Transform. Sequential and Progressive DCT based
encoding algorithms, lossless coding, and hierarchical coding. Basic concepts of discrete
wavelet transform coding and embedded image coding algorithms. Introduction to JPEG2000.

Feature of MPEG 1, structure of encoding and decoding process, MPEG 2 enhancements,

and different blocks of MPEG video encoder.

Content based video coding-overview of MPEG 4 video, motion estimation and compensation.
Different coding techniques and verification models. Block diagram of MPEG 4 video encoder
and decoder. An overview of H261 and H263 video coding techniques.

Text Book
1. Y.Q.Shi & H.Sun, Image and Video Compression for Multimedia Engineering, CRC
Press, 2000.
2. S.V.Raghavan & S,K,Tripathi, Networked Multimedia Systems, Prentice-Hall,1998.

References
1. J.F.K.Buford, Multimedia Systems, Pearson, 2000.
2. Recent literature in Multimedia Communication Technology.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 analyze various components of the multimedia systems and its storage devices.
CO2 appreciate the different coding standards for the digital audio and musical
synthesizers.
CO3 understand the various types of DCT based image encoding algorithms
CO4 understand the encoding and decoding process of the MPEG standards
CO5 analyze the different content-based video processing techniques.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 71 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE28

Course Title : COMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEMS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC18
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand the working principles of switching systems from manual and
electromechanical systems to stored program control systems.

Course Content
Basic elements of communication network. Switching systems. Signaling and signaling
functions.

Digital telephone network. TDM Principles. PCM primary multiplex group. Plesiochronous
digital hierarchy. Synchronous digital hierarchy. Echo cancellers.

Digital transmission and multiplexing. Synchronous versus Asynchronous transmission. Line

coding. Error performance. TDM. Framing, TDM loops and rings.

Space division switching. Multiple-stage switching. Design examples. Switching matrix control.
Time division switching. Multiple-stage time and spaces witching.

Timing recovery. Jitter. Network synchronization. Digital subscriber access-ISDN. ADSL.

HFC. Traffic analysis.

Text Book
1. J.C. Bellamy, “Digital Telephony”, Wiley, 3rd edition, 2011.
2. J.E. Flood, “Telecommunications Switching, Traffic and Networks” Pearson,1st
edition,2012

References
1. T.Viswanathan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks”, PHI, 2006.
2. E.Keiser & E.Strange, “Digital Telephony and Network Integration”, Springer, 2nd
edition, 1995.
3. R. L.Freeman, “Fundamentals of Telecommunications”, John Wiley and Sons,
2ndedition, 1999.
4. Recent literature in Communication Switching Systems.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 explain the working principle of switching systems involved in telecommunication
switching
CO2 assess the need for voice digitization and T Carrier systems
CO3 compare and analyze Line coding techniques and examine its error performance
CO4 design multi stage switching structures involving time and space switching stages
CO5 analyze basic telecommunication traffic theory

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 72 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE29

Course Title : BROADBAND ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC18 & ECPC19
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart fundamentals and latest technologies related to the design of broadband
last mile-Access technologies for multimedia communication

Course Content
Wired access technologies using Phone line modem, ISDN modem. Comparison-Cable, DSL,
fiber and wireless access technologies.

Last mile copper access, Flavors of Digital subscriber lines, DSL deployment, Common local
loop impairments, discrete multi-tone modulation, VDSL deployment and frequency plans.
Standards for XDSL and comparison.

Last mile HFC access, Cable modems. Modulation schemes, DOCSIS. Standards-
comparison, physical and MAC layer protocols for HFC networks, ATM and IP-centric modem.
Switched digital video.

Fiber access technologies and architectures. ATM passive optical networks, Upstream and
downstream transport, Frame format, Ethernet passive optical network, Gigabit passive
optical networks.

Survey on emerging broadband wireless access technologies. LMDS, MMDS, WIMAX and
WIFI, Satellite technologies serving as last mile solutions, Wireless LAN, Wireless personal
area networking, 3G and 4G wireless systems.

Text Book
1. N.Jayant, “Broadband last mile”-Taylor and Francisgroup,2005
2. N.Ransom & A.A. Azzam, “Broadband Access Technologies”, McGraw Hill, 1999.

References
1. M.P. Clarke, “Wireless Access Network”, Wiley, 2000.
2. T.Starr, M.Sorbara, J.M.Cioffi and P.J. Silverman,”DSLadvances”, PrenticeHall,2002
3. S. Mervana & C.Le, “Design and Implementation of DSL-based Access Solutions”,
Cisco Press, 2001.
4. W. Vermillion, “End-to-End DSL Architecture”, Cisco Press, 2003.
5. DOCSIS 2.0 “Radio frequency interface specification” www.cablemodem.com
6. ITU-T Rec., G.983.1 “Broadband Optical Access systems based on Passive
OpticalNetworks”,1998
7. Recent literature in Broadband Access Technologies.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 73 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 recall and identify the basics of broadband technology systems and differentiate the
differences between the various wired and wireless technology system
CO2 illustrate the aspects of last mile data transport on copper wire networks and flavors
of DSL
CO3 summarize the versions of cable network standard and MAC protocols for HFC
networks
CO4 distinguish the cost-effective broadband services for residential users and ATM
based and Ethernet based passive optical networks
CO5 outline the types of broadband wireless access technologies and their
characteristics.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 74 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE31

Course Title : FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC12 & ECPC18
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To help students understand the structures of optical fiber and types
CLO2 To expose students to different types of fiber impairments like optical losses and
signal dispersion in fibers.
CLO3 To get students introduced to the basics of optical sources and photodetectors.
CLO4 To get students introduced to the system design, WDM techniques, optical
amplification, and non-linear effects in optical fibers.

Course Content
Optical Fibers: Structure, Wave guiding. Step-index and Graded index optical fibers. Modal
analysis. Classification of modes. Single Mode Fibers.

Pulse dispersion. Material and Waveguide dispersion. Polarization Mode Dispersion.

Absorption, scattering and bending losses. Dispersion Shifted Fibers, Dispersion
Compensating Fibers.

Optical sources: LEDs and Laser Diodes. Optical Power Launching and Coupling. Source to
Fiber coupling, Fiber to Fiber joints. Misalignments. Schemes for coupling improvement.

Optical detectors: PIN and Avalanche photodiodes, Photo detector noise, Optical receivers.
Digital link design: Power budget and Rise time budget. Attenuation and Dispersion limit.

WDM Concepts. Optical Amplifiers: EDFA. Nonlinear effects: Self Phase Modulation,
Nonlinear Schrodinger Equation. Optical Soliton.

Text Book
1. G. Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications (5/e)”, McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. A. Ghatak & K. Thygarajan, “Introduction to Fiber Optics”, Cambridge, 1999.

References
1. G. P. Agarwal, “Fiber Optic Communication Systems”, (4/e), Wiley, 2010.
2. M. M. K. Liu, “Principles and Applications of Optical Communications”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2010.
3. A. Selvarajan, S. Kar and T. Srinivas, “Optical Fiber Communication Principles and
Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Recognize and classify the structures of Optical fiber and types.
CO2 Discuss the channel impairments like losses and dispersion.
CO3 Classify the Optical sources and calculate various coupling losses.
CO4 Classify detectors and to design a fiber optic link.
CO5 Familiar with concepts of WDM, optical amplifiers and Soliton Propagation.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 75 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE32

Course Title : DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING FOR WIRELESS
COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The subject aims to make the students to understand the usage of various signal
processing techniques used for wireless communication

Course Content
Mathematical model of the Time-varying wireless channel: multi-path model, Coherence time and
Doppler spread, Coherence frequency and Delay spread. Relationship between the time-varying
impulse response of the Base band and Bandpass Transmission. Discrete Complex Base band time
varying channel model for wireless communication. Computation of probability of error for Flat fading
Rayleigh channel, Flat fading Rician model and single tap channel with known filter co-efficient.

Autocorrelation and the Spectral density computation of base band and the band pass signal. Sampling
and reconstruction of W.S.S. random process. Spectral density computation for PSK, QPSK, FSK and
MSK. Relationship between Base band- and band-pass random process using Hilbert transformation.
Periodogram, Barlett method, Welch, Blackman and Tuckey methods of estimating spectrum of the
modulated signal.

Multiple input Multiple output (MIMO) System model, Zero forcing receiver, LMMSE receiver, Matched
filter receiver. Optimal precoding and combining, Spatial multiplexing using Decoupling of MIMO
system. Massive MIMO, Power scaling, Orthogonality, Multi-cell Multi user MIMO, Pilot contamination
and Rate scaling.

Orthogonal Frequency division Multiplexing (OFDM) Multicarrier modulation (MCM) , MCM

transmission/Received signal, MCM-IFFT/FFT Processing, MCM-Cyclic prefix, Spectrum of OFDM
transmission, MIMO-OFDM System model, BER of OFDM and MIMO-OFDM

5G Technology: Non-orthogonal multiple access, Spatial Modulation, Filter bank multi-carrier systems
(FBMC), FBMC-OQAM System model, MIMO-FBMC Signal processing, Full Duplex Radio, Self-
interference, Hybrid cancellation, mm wave MIMO Channel Modeling and Estimation.

Text Book
1. D. Tse and P.Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Cambridge
university press, 2005
2. A. Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press,2005
3. E.S.Gopi, “Digital signal processing for wireless communication using Matlab’’,
Springer, 2016

References
1. T.S.Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles (2/e)”, Pearson,2002.
2. E. Biglieri, R.Calderbank, A. Constantinides, A. Goldsmith, A.Paulraj, H.Vincent poor,
“MIMO Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press,2007.
3. Robert Gallager, Chapter 9: “Wireless communication”, course materials for 6.450
Principles of Digital communication I,Fall 2006.MIT Open
coursewarehttp://ocw.mit.edu/.
4. Recent literature in the related topics

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 76 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 summarize the importance of Coherence time, Coherence frequency, Doppler
spread and Delay spread in time-varying wireless channel model
CO2 derive the expression for BER for various wireless channel model.
CO3 derive the expression for the computation of spectral density of various bandpass
transmission and methodology to estimate from the received signal.
CO4 summarize the mathematical models related to MIMO and OFDM technology
CO5 summarize the signal processing aspects in various 5G Technology

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 77 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE33

Course Title : MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESIGN
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC16 & ECPC24
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of microwave electron beam devices and their
applications in X band frequency.

Course Content
Design and realization of power dividers, hybrids, directional couplers etc using strip lines and
micro strip lines.

Filter design; Kuroda identities. K and J inverters. Filter transformations. Realization using strip
lines and micro strip lines.

Transistor amplifiers; Power gain equations. Stability considerations. Analysis. Design using
MICs.
Transistor oscillators. Active devices for microwave oscillators. Three port S parameter
characterization of transistors. Oscillation and stability conditions.

Diode mixers. Mixer design. Single ended mixer. Balanced mixer. Image rejection mixer.
Phase shifter design. PIN diode. Phase shifter.

Text Book
1. I.J.Bahl & Bhartia, Microwave Solid State Circuit Design, Wiley, 1987.
2. G.D.Vendelin, Design of Amplifiers and Oscillators by the S Parameter Method,
Wiley, 1982.

References
1. Stripline-like Transmission Lines for Microwave Integrated Circuits - Bharathi Bhat,
Shiban Koul, New Age International(P) Limited, Publishers, 2007
2. Microwave Engineering, David M Pozar, John Wiley & Sons,In International Student
Edition
3. T.C.Edwards, Foundations for Microstrip Circuit Design (2/e), Wiley, 1992.
4. Recent literature in Microwave Integrated Circuit Design.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 the topics will make students design of the important and essential M.I.C
components
CO2 Filter is the most needed circuit for many applications and the unit will make the
student confident in filter design
CO3 All aspects and different parameters, design factors and properties will me made
thorough
CO4 One will be confident to handle any oscillator design
CO5 The student will become familiar and confident in the design of Mixers, the other
essential circuits.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 78 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE34

Course Title : RF MEMS CIRCUIT DESIGN
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC16 & ECPC24
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of MEMS and their applications in RF circuit
design.

Course Content
Introduction to Micromachining Processes. RF MEMS relays and switches. Switch
parameters. Actuation mechanisms. Bi-stable relays and micro actuators. Dynamics of
switching operation.

MEMS inductors and capacitors. Micro machined inductor. Effect of inductor layout. Modeling
and design issues of planar inductor. Gap-tuning and area-tuning capacitors. Dielectric
tunable capacitors.

MEMS phase shifters. Types. Limitations. Switched delay lines. Fundamentals of RF MEMS
Filters. Micro machined transmission lines. Coplanar lines. Micro machined directional coupler
and mixer.

Micro machined antennas. Micro strip antennas –design parameters. Micromachining to

improve performance. Reconfigurable antennas.

Text Book
1. Vijay.K.Varadanetal, “RF MEMS and their Applications”, Wiley-India, 2011.

References
1. H.J.D.Santos, “RF MEMS Circuit Design for Wireless Communications”, Artech
House, 2002.
2. G.M.Rebeiz, “RF MEMS Theory, Design, and Technology”, Wiley, 2003.
3. Recent literature in RF MEMS Circuit Design.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 learn the Micromachining Processes
CO2 learn the design and applications of RF MEMS inductors and capacitors.
CO3 learn about RF MEMS Filters and RF MEMS Phase Shifters.
CO4 learn about the suitability of micro machined transmission lines for RF MEMS
CO5 learn about the Micro machined Antennas and Reconfigurable Antennas

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 79 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE35

Course Title : SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC18
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce and to make understand the radio propagation channel for Earth
station to satellite & satellite to Earth station.
CLO2 To introduce various aspects in the design of communication & multiple access
systems for satellite communication.
CLO3 To introduce the concept of launchers and design of Earth station and satellite link.

Course Content
Elements of orbital mechanics. Equations of motion. Tracking and orbit determination. Orbital
correction/control. Satellite launch systems. Multistage rocket launchers and their
performance.

Elements of communication satellite design. Spacecraft subsystems. Reliability

considerations. Spacecraft integration.

Multiple access techniques. FDMA, TDMA, CDMA. Random access techniques. Satellite on-
board processing.

Satellite Link Design: Performance requirement and standards. Laser Satellite

Communication: Link analysis, optical satellite link transmitter, optical satellite link receiver,
satellite beam acquisition, tracking & positioning, deep space optical communication link.

Earth station design. Configurations. Antenna and tracking systems. Satellite broadcasting.
GPS. VSAT.

Text Book
1. D. Roddy, “Satellite Communication (4/e)”, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
2. T. Pratt & C. W. Bostain, “Satellite Communication”, Wiley 2000.

References
1. Bruce R. Elbert, ‘The Satellite Communication Applications’ Hand Book, Artech
House Bostan London, 1997.
2. B. N. Agrawal, “Design of Geo synchronous Spacecraft”, Prentice-Hall, 1986.
3. A.K. Maini, V. Agrawal, “Satellite Communications”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 1999.
4. Recent literature in Satellite Communication.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 learn the dynamics of the satellite.
CO2 learn the spacecraft and subsystems.
CO3 understand how analog and digital technologies are used for satellite
communication networks.
CO4 understand the radio frequency channel from Earth station to Satellite.
CO5 study the design of Earth station and tracking of the satellites.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 80 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE36

Course Title : PRINCIPLES OF RADAR
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC20
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the working principles of a radar from a signal
processing perspective.

Course Content
Radar equation. Radar cross section. Cross section of small targets. Target scattering
matrices. Area and volume targets.

Radar signals. Ambiguity function and its properties. Uncertainty principle. Pulse compression.
Linear FM pulse. Pulse compression by Costas FM and binary phase coding.

Radar detection. Optimum Bayesian decision rules. Detection criteria for different target
models.

Range and Doppler measurements and tracking. Range and Doppler frequency resolutions.
Optimum receivers. Optimum filters for Doppler measurements. Coherent and non-coherent
implementations.

Angle measurement and tracking. Angle measurement and tracking by conical scan and mono
pulse. Optimum mono pulse systems.

Text Book
1. P.Z.Peebles, Radar Principles, Wiley, 1998.
2. Merrill I. Skolink, Introduction to Radar Systems, (3/e), Tata MG Graw Hill,2001

References
1. N.Levanon, Radar Signals, Wiley, 2005.
2. D.Wehnar: High Resolution Radar, Artech Hous, 1987.
3. D.K.Barton: Radar systems Analysis, Prentice Hall, 1976.
4. Recent literature in Principles of Radar.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the principle behind radar range equation and different types of targets
available.
CO2 Appreciate the different compression techniques of radar pulse signals.
CO3 Distinguish between different detection methods of radar signals.
CO4 Appreciate the building blocks for optimum receiver and Doppler measurements.
CO5 Understand the tracking and scanning methods in the mono pulse systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 81 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE37

Course Title : LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC23
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the low voltage device modelling, low voltage, low power
VLSI CMOS circuit design.

Course Content
CMOS fabrication process, Shallow trench isolation. Lightly-doped drain. Buried channel.
Fabrication process of BiCMOS and SOI CMOS technologies.

Modeling of CMOS devices parameters. Threshold voltage, Body effect, short channel and
Narrow channel effects, Electron temperature, and MOS capacitance.

CMOS inverters, static logic circuits of CMOS, pass transistor, BiCMOS, SOI CMOS and low
power CMOS techniques.

Basic concepts of dynamic logic circuits. Various problems associated with dynamic logic
circuits. Differential, BiCMOS and low voltage dynamic logic circuits.

CMOS memory circuits, Decoders, sense amplifiers, SRAM architecture. Low voltage SRAM
techniques.

Text Book
1. Jan Rabaey,”Low Power Design Essentials (Integrated Circuits and Systems)”,
Springer,2009
2. J.B.Kuo&J.H.Lou,”Low-voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, Wiley, 1999.

References
1. A.Bellaowar&M.I.Elmasry,”Low power Digital VLSI Design, Circuits and Systems”,
Kluwer, 1996.
2. Recent literature in Low Power VLSI Circuits.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 acquire the knowledge about various CMOS fabrication process and its modeling.
CO2 infer about the second order effects of MOS transistor characteristics.
CO3 analyze and implement various CMOS static logic circuits.
CO4 learn the design of various CMOS dynamic logic circuits.
CO5 learn the different types of memory circuits and their design.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 82 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE38

Course Title : ADHOC WIRELESS NETWORKS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPE10
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To analyze the various design issues and challenges in the layered architecture of
Ad hoc wireless networks

Course Content
Cellular and ad hoc wireless networks, Applications of ad hoc wireless networks. Issues in ad hoc
wireless networks-medium access scheme, routing, transport layer protocols, security and energy
management. Ad hoc wireless internet.

Design goals of a MAC protocol, Contention based protocols; Contention based protocols with
reservation mechanisms and scheduling mechanisms, MAC protocols using directional antennas.

Table driven routing protocols, on demand routing protocols, hybrid routing protocols, Hierarchical
routing protocols, Power aware routing protocols, Tree based and mesh-based multicast routing
protocols

Network security requirements-Issues and challenges, network security attacks, key management,
secure routing protocols

Energy management schemes-Battery management, transmission power management, system power

management schemes. Quality of service solutions in ad hoc wireless networks.

Text Book
1. C.Siva ram murthy, B.S. Manoj, “Ad hoc wireless networks-Architectures and
protocols” Pearson Education, 2005
2. S.Basagni, M.Conti, “Mobile ad hoc networking”, Wielyinterscience2004

References
1. C. E.Perkins ,” Ad hoc networking”, AddisonWesley,2001
2. X.Cheng, X.Huang ,D.Z. DU,” Ad hoc wireless networking”, Kluwer
AcademicPublishers,2004
3. G. Aggelou,”Mobile ad hoc networks-From wireless LANs to 4G networks”, McGraw
Hill publishers,2005
4. Recent literature in ADHOC Wireless Networks.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 compare the differences between cellular and ad hoc networks and the analyze the
challenges at various layers and applications
CO2 summarize the protocols used at the MAC layer and scheduling mechanisms
CO3 compare and analyze types of routing protocols used for unicast and multicast
routing
CO4 examine the network security solution and routing mechanism
CO5 evaluate the energy management schemes and Quality of service solution in ad hoc
networks

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 83 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE39

Course Title : WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPE10
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To overview the various design issues and challenges in the layered architecture
of Wireless sensor networks

Course Content
Motivation for a network of wireless sensor nodes-Definitions and background-challenges and
constraints for wireless sensor networks-Applications. Node architecture-sensing subsystems,
processing Subsystems, Communication interfaces, Prototypes.

Physical layer- Introduction, wireless channel and communication fundamentals – frequency allocation,
modulation and demodulation, wave propagation effects and noise, channels models, spread spectrum
communication, packet transmission and synchronization, quality of wireless channels and measures
for improvement, physical layer and transceiver design consideration in wireless sensor networks,
Energy usage profile, choice of modulation, Power Management

Data link layer- Fundamentals of wireless MAC protocols, Characteristics of MAC protocol in wireless
sensor networks contention-based protocols, Contention free MAC protocols, Hybrid MAC protocols

Network layer-routing metrics-Flooding and gossiping, Data centric routing, proactive routing on
demand routing, hierarchical routing, Location based routing, QOS based routing. Data Aggregation –
Various aggregation techniques.

Case study-Target detection tracking, Habitat monitoring, Environmental disaster monitoring, Practical
implementation issues, IEEE 802.15.4 low rate WPAN, Operating System Design Issues. Simulation
tools.

Text Book
1. W. Dargie, C. Poellabauer, ”Fundamentals of Wireless sensor networks-Theory and
Practice”, John Wiley & Sons Publication2010
2. K. Sohraby, D.Minoli and T.Znati, “Wireless Sensor Network Technology- Protocols
and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

References
1. F.Zhao, L.Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks: an information processing approach”,
Elsevier publication, 2004.
2. C.S.Raghavendra Krishna, M.Sivalingam and Taribznati, “Wireless Sensor
Networks”, Springer publication, 2004.
3. H. Karl, A.willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John
Wiley publication, Jan2006.
4. K.Akkaya and M.Younis, “A Survey of routing protocols in wireless sensor networks”,
Elsevier Adhoc Network Journal, Vol.3, no.3, pp. 325-349, 2005.
5. Philip Levis, “TinyOS Programming”, 2006 –www.tinyos.net.
6. I.F. Akyildiz, W. Su, Sankarasubramanian, E. Cayirci, “Wireless sensor networks:
a survey”, computer networks, Elsevier, 2002, 394 -422.
7. Jamal N. Al-karaki, Ahmed E. Kamal, “Routing Techniques in Wireless sensor
networks: A survey”, IEEE wireless communication, December 2004, 6 –28.
8. Recent literature in Wireless Sensor Networks.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 84 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 analyze the challenges and constraints of wireless sensor network and its
subsystems
CO2 examine the physical layer specification, modulation and transceiver design
considerations
CO3 analyze the protocols used at the MAC layer and scheduling mechanisms
CO4 compare and analyse the types of routing protocols and data aggregation
techniques
CO5 identify the application areas and practical implementation issues.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 85 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE40

Course Title : Nano Electronics
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To present the state of the art in the areas of semiconductor device physics and
materials technology to enable nano-electronics
CLO2 To provide an overview of nano materials and device fabrication
CLO3 To discuss the extensive materials characterization techniques

Course Content
Overview: Nano devices, Nano materials, Nano characterization. Introduction to nano-
electronics, CMOS technology scaling issues, Design techniques for nanoscale transistors

MOS Electrical characterization, non-classical MOSFETs: overview and carrier transport in

Nano-MOSFETs, Silicon on Insulator (SOI) MOSFET

Metal-Semiconductor contacts and Metal-Source/Drain Junction MOSFETs, Germanium and

compound semiconductor Nano MOSFETs

Introduction to Nanomaterials, Quantum Mechanics and Quantum Statistics for considering

Nanomaterials.

Quantum mechanics and Quantum statistics for considering nanomaterials,

synthesis/fabrication of nanomaterials, chemical vapour deposition (CVD) and atomic layer
deposition (ALD). Characterization techniques for nanomaterials and nano structures – FTIR,
XRD, AFM, SEM, TEM, EDAX

NPTEL Link:
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117108047

Text Book
1. Y. Taur and T. Ning, “Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices”, Cambridge University
Press, 2nd Edition, 2013.

References
1. Plummer, Deal and Griffin, “Silicon VLSI Technology”, 1st edition, Pearson
education, 2000.
2. Brundle, C. R., Evans, Charles A. jr., Wilson and Shaun, “Encyclopedia of Materials
Characterization, 1992.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 get an insight of nano devices and nano materials
CO2 learn the nano-micro fabrication
CO3 get a foundation for the device fabrication
CO4 study vast understanding to the device electronics for integrated circuits
CO5 get an insight of nano materials and its characterization techniques.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 86 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE41

Course Title : ELECTRONIC DESIGN AUTOMATION TOOLS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students exposed to Front end and Back-end VLSI CAD tools.

Course Content
OS Architecture: System settings and configuration. Introduction to UNIX commands Handling
directories, Filters and Piping, Wildcards and Regular expression, Power Filters and Files
Redirection. Working on Vi editor, Basic Shell Programming, TCL Scripting language.

Algorithms in VLSI: Partitioning methods: K-L, FM, and Simulated annealing algorithms.
Placement and Routing algorithms, Interconnects and delay estimation.

Synthesis and simulation using HDLs-Logic synthesis using Verilog. Memory and FSM
synthesis. Performance driven synthesis, Simulation- Types of simulation. Static timing
analysis. Formal verification. Switch level and transistor level simulation.

System Verilog- Introduction, Design hierarchy, Data types, Operators and language
constructs. Functional coverage, Assertions, Interfaces and test bench structures.

Analog/Mixed Signal Modelling and Verification: Analog/ Mixed signal modelling using Verilog-
A and Verilog-AMS. Event Driven Modelling: Real number modelling of Analog/Mixed blocks
modelling using Verilog-RNM/System Verilog. Analog/Digital Boundary Issues: boundary
issues coverage

Text Book
1. M.J.S.Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Pearson, 2008.
2. S.Sutherland, S. Davidmann, P. Flake, “System Verilog for Design”, (2/e), Springer,
2006.

References
1. H.Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley, 1999
2. Z. Dr Mark, “Digital System Design with System Verilog “, Pearson, 2010.
3. Recent literature in Electronic Design Automation Tools.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 execute the special features of VLSI back end and front-end CAD tools and UNIX
shell script
CO2 explain the algorithms used for ASIC construction
CO3 design synthesizable Verilog and VHDL code.
CO4 explain the difference between Verilog and system Verilog and are able to write
system Verilog code.
CO5 Model Analog and Mixed signal blocks using Verilog A and Verilog AMS

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 87 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE42

Course Title : Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Electromagnetic interference (EMI) is a potential threat to the present-day
electronic systems. The main objective of the course is to provide insight into
various sources of electromagnetic interferences and how to design an electronic
product which is electromagnetically compatible with each other

Course Content
Introduction to EMI and EMC- Various EMC requirements and standards-Need for EMC and its
importance in electronic product design - sources of EMI - few case studies on EMC.

Conducted and radiated emission -power supply line filters-common mode and differential mode
current-common mode choke- switched mode power supplies. Shielding techniques- shielding
effectiveness-shield behavior for electric and magnetic field -aperture-seams-conductive gaskets-
conductive coatings

Grounding techniques- signal ground-single point and multi point grounding-system ground-common
impedance coupling -common mode choke-Digital circuit power distribution and grounding.

Contact protection - arc and glow discharge-contact protection network for inductive loads-C, RC, RCD
protection circuit- inductive kick back. RF and transient immunity-transient protection network- RFI
mitigation filter-power line disturbance- ESD- human body model- ESD protection in system design.

PCB design for EMC compliance-PCB layout and stack up- multi layer PCB objectives- Return path
discontinuities-mixed signal PCB layout. EMC pre compliance measurement-conducted and radiated
emission test-LISN-Anechoic chamber.

Text Book
1. H. W. Ott, Electromagnetic Compatibility Engineering, 2nd edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2011, ISBN: 9781118210659.
2. C. R. Paul, Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility, 2nd edition, Wiley India,
2010, ISBN: 9788126528752

References
1. K. L. Kaiser, Electromagnetic Compatibility Handbook, 1st edition, CRC Press, 2005.
ISBN: 9780849320873

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the various sources of Electromagnetic interference
CO2 Familiarize the fundamentals those are essential for product design with EMC
compliance and various EMC standards
CO3 would gain knowledge to understand the concept of Shielding and grounding related
to product design
CO4 Design PCBs which are electromagnetically compatible
CO5 understand and differentiate the various EMC pre compliance measurement

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 88 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE43

Course Title : Computer Vision
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The focus of this course is the understanding of algorithms and techniques used
in computer vision
CLO2 Provide pointers into the literature and exercise a project based on a literature
search and one or more research papers
CLO3 Practice software implementation of different concepts and techniques covered in
the course
CLO4 Utilize programming and scientific tools for relevant software implementation

Course Content
Introduction: overview of computer vision, related areas, and applications; overview of software tools;
overview of course objectives.; introduction to OpenCV. Image formation and representation: imaging
geometry, radiometry, digitization, cameras and projections, rigid and affine transformations, Filtering:
convolution, smoothing, differencing, and scale space.

Feature detection: edge detection, corner detection, line and curve detection, active contours, SIFT and
HOG descriptors, shape context descriptors, Model fitting: Hough transform, line fitting, ellipse and
conic sections fitting, algebraic and Euclidean distance measures.

Camera calibration: camera models; intrinsic and extrinsic parameters; radial lens distortion; direct
parameter calibration; camera parameters from projection matrices; orthographic, weak perspective,
affine, and perspective camera models.

Motion analysis: the motion field of rigid objects; motion parallax; optical flow, the image brightness
constancy equation, affine flow; differential techniques; feature-based techniques; regularization and
robust estimation; motion segmentation through EM, Motion tracking: statistical filtering; iterated
estimation; observability and linear systems; the Kalman filter; the extended Kalman filter.

Object recognition and shape representation: alignment, appearance-based methods, invariants, image
Eigen spaces, data-based techniques.

Text Book
1. Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, R. Szeliski, Springer, 2011
2. Computer Vision: A Modern Approach, D. Forsyth and J. Ponce, Prentice Hall, 2nd
ed., 2011
3. Introductory techniques for 3D computer vision, E. Trucco and A. Verri, Prentice Hall,
1998

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 To understand the fundamental problems of computer vision
CO2 To learn techniques, mathematical concepts and algorithms used in computer vision
to facilitate further study in this area
CO3 To get an idea regarding the camera calibration and its importance
CO4 To study different kinds of motion estimation methodologies and its applications
CO5 To understand the basic concepts of object and shape recognition techniques

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 89 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE44

Course Title : Natural Language Processing
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Understand NLP tasks in syntax, semantics and pragmatics
CLO2 Implement machine learning techniques used in NLP

Course Content
Introduction – Why NLP? NLP versus speech recognition- Applications-problem of ambiguity-
role of machine learning in NLP- Basic neural networks for NLP

Words – Morphology and Finite State Transducers-Tokenization – Computational Phonology

and Pronunciation Modelling

Probabilistic models in NLP—Role of language models- Simple N-gram model – Evaluation:

Perplexity and Word Error Rate. Parts of Speech Tagging- Hidden Markov models–Viterbi
algorithm, Maximum Entropy Markov model

Semantic analysis - Lexical semantics and word-sense disambiguation. Compositional

semantics. Semantic Role Labeling and Semantic Parsing

Machine Translation- Statistical translation, word alignment, phrase-based translation, and

synchronous grammars, evaluation.

References
1. Natural Language Processing, by Jacob Eisenstein, MIT Press.
2. Speech and Language Processing by Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin
3. Foundations of Statistical Natural Language processing by Manning C. D. and
Schutze H., First Edition, MIT Press, 1999
4. Neural Network Methods for Natural Language Processing by Yoav Goldberg,
Morgan & Claypool Publishers.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand NLP and the role of machine learning in NLP
CO2 Describe finite state transducer operations and pronunciation modelling in NLP
CO3 Illustrate various probabilistic models in NLP.
CO4 Study semantic analysis in NLP
CO5 Learn various machine translation approaches and the different evaluation metrics.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 90 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE45

Course Title : Optimization Methods In Machine Learning
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The course aims to equip students with advanced techniques and methods in
optimization that are tailored to large-scale statistics and machine learning
problems

Course Content
Basics of convex optimization-convex sets, convexity-preserving operations, examples of convex
programs (linear programming (LP), second-order cone programming (SOCP), semidefinite
programming (SDP)), convex relaxation, KKT conditions, duality

Gradient-based methods-gradient descent, sub gradient, mirror descent, Frank–Wolfe method,

Nesterov’s accelerated gradient method, ODE interpretations, dual methods, Nesterov’s smoothing,
proximal gradient methods, Moreau–Yosida regularization

Operator splitting methods-augmented Lagrangian methods, alternating direction method of multipliers

(ADMM), monotone operators, Douglas–Rachford splitting, primal and dual decomposition

Stochastic and nonconvex optimization-Dual averaging, Polyak–Juditsky averaging, stochastic

variance reduced gradient (SVRG), Langevin dynamics, escaping saddle points, landscape of
nonconvex problems, deep learning

Applications of optimization methods in Image/Video/Multimedia Processing

Text Book
1. Stephen Boyd and Lieven Vandenberghe’s book: Convex Optimization
2. Nesterov’s old book: Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course
3. Nesterov’s new book: Lectures on Convex Optimization
4. Neal Parikh and Stephen Boyd’s monograph: Proximal Algorithms
5. Sebastien Bubeck’s monograph: Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity

References
1. Moritz Hardt’s Berkeley EE 227C course note
2. Prateek Jain and Purushottam Kar’s survey on nonconvex optimization
3. Kristin Bennett, Emilio Parrado-Hernandez. Interplay of Optimization and Machine
Learning Research, Journal of Machine Learning Research, 2006.
4. Nati Srebro, Ambuj Tewari. Stochastic Optimization for Machine Learning, Tutorial at
International Conference on Machine Learning, 2010.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 To learn the basic concepts of convex optimization
CO2 To study gradient based optimization techniques
CO3 To understand the problem-solving using operator splitting methods
CO4 To learn stochastic and non-convex optimization Techniques,
CO5 To execute applications of optimization techniques in different domains

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 91 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE46

Course Title : Hardware for Deep Learning
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To get an idea about deep learning and how to implement deep learning algorithms
on FPGA

Course Content
Introduction to Deep Learning: From AI to DL, Neural Network: Perceptron, Back Propagation,
Over-fitting, Regularization. Deep Networks: Definition, Motivation, Applications, Convolution
Neural Network (CNN): Basic architecture, Activation functions, Pooling, Handling vanishing
gradient problem, Dropout, Weight initialization methods, Batch Normalization. Training
Neural networks, Additional CNN Components, Famous CNNs, Applications, Software
libraries.

Computing Convolutions: Mapping Matrix multiplication, Computational Transforms,

Accelerator Architectures, Dataflow Taxonomy

Reducing the Complexity: Light weight models, reducing precision, Aggressive Quantization,
pruning & Deep compression.

The Deep Learning Acceleration Landscape: parallelism in deep learning, Traditional

programmable hardware, specialized deep learning hardware platforms, deep learning
software stack, Specialized research ASICs.

FPGAs for Deep Learning: Overview of hardware architectures for deep learning, Effective
management of FPGA memory resources, optimizing algorithms and data representation for
FPGA arithmetic resources, Integrating hardware and software.

Text Book
1. Ian Goodfellow, Yishuv Bengio and Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning.” MIT Press.
2016. ISBN: 978-0262035613. Available online for free at:
http://www.deeplearningbook.org
2. Vivienne Sze; Yu-Hsin Chen; Tien-Ju Yang; Joel S. Emer, “Efficient Processing of
Deep Neural Networks” Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 1st Edition, 2020.
3. Tushar Krishna, Hyoukjun Kwon, Angshuman Parashar, Michael Pellauer, and
Ananda Samajdar, “Data Orchestration in Deep Learning Accelerators”, Morgan &
Claypool Publishers, 1st Edition, 2020.

References
1. Piotr Antonik, “Application of FPGA to Real‐Time Machine Learning”, Springer, 2018.
2. Stanford C231n, 2017
3. Sze, et al. https://eyeriss.mit.edu/ ISCA Tutorial 2019
4. Sze, et al. “Efficient Processing of Deep Neural Networks: A Tutorial and Survey”,
Proceedings of the IEEE, 2017
5. Prof. Adam Teman https://www.eng.biu.ac.il/temanad/hardware-for-deep-learning/
6. https://jameswhanlon.com/

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 92 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the context of convolutional neural networks and deep learning
algorithms.
CO2 Know how to use convolution in deep learning techniques.
CO3 Understand the necessity and importance of light weight models with low complexity
through specialized hardware architecture
CO4 Know how to optimize hardware performance in deep neural network applications.
CO5 Discuss, suggest and evaluate specialized hardware architectures to implement
deep learning algorithms in FPGA and utilize deep learning concepts in resource
constrained reliable systems

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 93 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE47

Course Title : Image and Video Processing
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The course aims to equip students with basic image and video processing
techniques.

Course Content
Image Formation and Representation: 3D to 2D projection, photometric image formation,
trichromatic colour representation, video format (SD, HD, UHD, HDR), contrast enhancement
(concept of histogram, nonlinear mapping, histogram equalization)

Review of 1D Fourier transform and convolution: Concept of spatial frequency. Continuous

and Discrete Space 2D Fourier transform. 2D convolution and its interpretation in frequency
domain. Implementation of 2D convolution. Separable filters. Frequency response. Linear
filtering (2D convolution) for noise removal, image sharpening, and edge detection. Gaussian
filters, DOG and LOG filters as image.

Geometric mapping and Feature detection: Geometric mapping (affine, homography), Feature
based camera motion estimation (RANSAC). Image warping. Image registration. Panoramic
view stitching, Feature detection (Harris corner, scale space, SIFT), feature descriptors (SIFT).
Bag of Visual Word representation for image classification.

Motion estimation: optical flow equation, optical flow estimation (Lucas-Kanade method, KLT
tracker); block matching, multi-resolution estimation. Deformable registration (medical
applications), Moving object detection (background/foreground separation): Robust PCA (low
rank + sparse decomposition). Global camera motion estimation from optical flows. Video
stabilization. Video scene change detection.

Video Coding: block-based motion compensated prediction and interpolation, adaptive spatial
prediction, block-based hybrid video coding, rate-distortion optimized mode selection, rate
control, Group of pictures (GoP) structure, tradeoff between coding efficiency, delay, and
complexity, depth from disparity, disparity estimation, view synthesis. Multiview video
compression. Depth camera (Kinect). 360 video camera and view stitching.

Text Book
1. Richard Szeliski, Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications. (Available
online:”Link“) (Cover most of the material, except sparsity-based image processing
and image and video coding)
2. (Optional) Y. Wang, J. Ostermann, and Y.Q.Zhang, Video Processing and
Communications. Prentice Hall, 2002. “Link” (Reference for image and video coding,
motion estimation, and stereo)
3. (Optional) R. C. Gonzalez and R. E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall,
(3rd Edition) 2008. ISBN number 9780131687288. “Link” (Good reference for basic
image processing, wavelet transforms and image coding).

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 94 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the concept of image formation and representation
CO2 Know the need of transformation and convolution
CO3 Understand the necessity and importance of feature detection and geometric
mapping
CO4 Know how to do motion estimation in video
CO5 To understand the basic ideas of video coding

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 95 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE48

Course Title : Automated Test Engineering for Electronics
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) – types of PCB – multilayer PCBs – Plated though Hole Technology
(PTH) - Surface Mount Technology (SMT) – Ball Grid Array (BGA) Technology. Bare PCB electrical test
concepts, Loaded PCB Visual inspection, Automated Optical inspection systems, X-Ray inspection
systems- Measuring Passive components – 2 wires, 3 wire, 4 wire and 6 wire measurement concepts,
Guarding techniques, Shorts location, Most common manufacturing defects, Automated Manufacturing
defect analyzers, Nodal Impedance / analog signature analysis. Flying probe testers.

Concepts of PCB Trouble-shooting, Symptom recognition, Bracketing technique, Failure types and fault
causes, Manual Trouble shooting, Use of DMM, Oscilloscope, Signal Generators, Logic Probes, Logic
Pulsers, Logic Analyzers, Automated Test Techniques – CPU Emulation technique, ROM Emulation,
In-Circuit Comparators, In- Circuit Emulators, Functional Testing of Digital ICs, Library models,
Concepts of In-circuit Testing, - Back Driving technique – international defence standards - Auto
Compensation, In-Circuit Test of Open collector / Emitter Devices, Tri-State, Bi-Directional Devices,
Concepts of Digital Guarding, Analog and Mixed Signal ICs Test, advantages and limitations of in-circuit
testing, AC – DC Parametric testing, –Advanced test techniques- Boundary Scan Test , Learn and
compare technique – digital signatures, Bus Cycle Signature Test , Analog signatures.

ATE system components, Main Test Vector processor, Digital Subsystem, Pin Electronics,
Programmable drive and threshold levels, RAM behind each pin, Controlling slew rate, Skew between
channels, Data formats, Digital and analog simulation, Test Vector Generation, Fault simulation, Fault
coverage, Test Languages, Verilog, VHDL, Automatic compare, Analog Sub system, Digital and analog
matrix switch circuits, digital and analog highways, Integration of JTAG, Boundary Scan Test, BSDL,
External Instrumentation, Functional and Timing tests.

Concepts of Test Program (T.P) Generation. Commercially available off the shelf Test Equipment’s
(COTS)

Board Functional Test (BFT) techniques – Go-No-go Test – Diagnostic Test, Reliability Test, Thermal
Shock Test, Full functional Edge to edge test, Cluster Test – Guided Probe Backtracking Technique –
Simulators – Online and Offline Simulation - Fault Simulation– Comprehensiveness of Board program
– Fault Dictionary– Analysis – BS and Non-BS device testing–- Sample board programming and testing
– BS interconnect and simulating faults - External Instrumentation used for board testing – PXI
Instrumentation – Integration of PXI instruments for testing

Design for testability (DFT) and Design for manufacturability (DFM) - Basics of ATPG, – Fault Models
–– Design considerations for edge functional test, Design considerations for Bus Cycle Signature Test,
Design considerations for Boundary Scan Test, Built-in Self-Test, Modular Design– ATE for test - DFM
- Manufacturing phases in industry-oriented Production process – strategies – new strategy - benefits
of new strategies

References
1. Test Engineering for Electronic Hardware – S R Sabapathi, Qmax Test Equipments P. Ltd.,
2011
2. Practical Electronic Fault Finding and Troubleshooting - Robin Pain Newnes, Reed
Educational and professional publishing Ltd., 1996
3. The Fundamentals of Digital Semiconductor Testing, Floyd, Pearson Education India, Sep-
2005
4. Building a Successful Board Test Strategy-Stephen F Scheiber-Butterworth Heinemann

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 96 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE49

Course Title : Foundations of Artificial Intelligence
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : Programming
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Learning the principles and fundamentals of designing AI programs
CLO2 Developing insights into the suitability and applicability of different models for
solving different problems
CLO3 Designing AI techniques for solving problems

Course Content
Unit 1: Introduction to Artificial Intelligence: Search and Problem Solving, Uninformed search,
Informed search.

Unit 2: Local search, Adversarial Search, Constraint satisfaction, Logic in AI.

Unit 3: Reasoning under uncertainty: Probability theory, Bayesian networks, Inference,

Probabilistic reasoning over time.

Unit 4: Decision making: Decision theory, Decision networks, Markov decision processes,
Reinforcement learning, multi-agent systems.

Unit 5: Machine learning: Decision tree learning, Statistical learning, Neural networks,
Introduction to Deep learning, Deep reinforcement learning, AI applications.

References
1. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 3rd
Edition, PHI 2009.
2. Patrick Henry Winston, Artificial Intelligence, Third Edition, Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, 2004.
3. Nils J Nilsson, Principles of Artificial Intelligence, Illustrated Reprint Edition, Springer
Heidelberg, 2014.
4. Nils J. Nilsson, Quest for Artificial Intelligence, First Edition, Cambridge University
Press, 2010.
5. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, Deep Learning, MIT Press
(2016).
6. Richard Sutton and Andrew Barto, Reinforcement Learning (2nd Edition), MIT Press
(2018).
7. Christopher Bishop, Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Springer, New York,
2006.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 To understand the foundational concepts of artificial intelligence
CO2 To apply search and problem-solving techniques
CO3 To understand decision theory and apply reasoning mechanisms
CO4 To apply appropriate machine learning algorithms to solve problems in AI
applications such as vision, speech, NLP etc.
CO5 Equipped with the expertise to research on advanced artificial intelligence topics

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 97 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE50

Course Title : Photonic Integrated Circuits
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce students to the basic structures of integrated optical waveguides and
devices.
CLO2 To expose students to different types of application-specific photonic integrated
circuits and devices.
CLO3 To get students introduced to the varieties of materials and fabrication technology
for optical integrated circuits
CLO4 To get students introduced to the nonlinear effects in integrated optical
waveguides.

Course Content
Brief history of optical communication, Advantages of integrated optics configuration, Guided
TE and TM Modes of Symmetric and anti-symmetric planar waveguides: Step-index and
graded- index waveguides. Strip and channel waveguides, Beam propagation method.

Directional couplers, Applications as power splitters, Y-junction, optical switch; modulators,

filters, A/D converters, Mode splitters, Mach-Zehnder interferometer-based devices.

Acousto-optic waveguide devices. Arrayed waveguide devices, Nano-photonic-devices:

Metal/dielectric plasmonic waveguides, Surface Plasmon modes, applications in waveguide
polarizers.

Materials. Glass, lithium niobate, silicon, compound semiconductors. Fabrication of integrated

optical waveguides and devices. Lithography, deposition.

Waveguide characterization, prism coupling, grating and tapered couplers, Nonlinear effects
in integrated optical waveguides, Types and Applications.

References
1. H. Nishihara, M. Haruna and T. Suhara, Optical Integrated Circuits; McGraw-Hill
Book Company, New York, 1989.
2. A. Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical Electronics, Cambridge University Press,
1989.
3. José Capmany and Daniel Pérez, Photonic Integrated Circuits, Oxford University
Press, 2020
4. T. Tamir, Guided wave opto-electronics, Springer Verilag, 1990.
5. K. Okamota, Fundamentals of Optical waveguides, Academic Press, 2006.
6. T. Tamir, Integrated Optics, Springer Verlag, New York, 1982.
7. C. R. Pollock and M Lipson, Integrated photonics, Kluwer Pub, 2003.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 98 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Recognize the fundamental concept of optical waveguides
CO2 Classify the different types of optical waveguides.
CO3 Classify the couplers, modulators and devices for communication applications
CO4 Familiar with fabrication technologies for design of optical waveguides
CO5 Discuss the various nonlinear effects in integrated optical waveguides.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 99 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE51

Course Title : Microwave Circuits
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students familiarize with ABCD parameters, S parameters,
Applications of planar transmission lines in the practical microwave circuits,
Design and layout of all Microwave Integrated Circuit Design components and then
systems.

Course Content
Introduction and application of microwave circuits - Two-port network characterization. ABCD
parameters, Conversion of S matrix in terms of ABCD matrix. Scattering matrix representation
of microwave components. Review of Smith chart and its application- Impedance matching
using Lumped and Distributed approach.

Microwave Passive circuit design: Characteristics, properties, design parameters and

applications- Design and realization of MIC Power dividers. 3 dB hybrid design. Directional
Coupler design- Hybrid ring design.

Microwave filter design- Filter design by insertion loss method –Richards and Kuroda
transformation. K inverter, J inverter. Resonator filters. Realization using microstrip lines and
strip lines.

Microwave amplifier design- Power gain equations -Stability considerations. Maximum gain
design, Design for specific gain -Low Noise Amplifier Design. High power design.

Microwave oscillator design. One – port and two – port negative resistance oscillators and
oscillator design

Text Book
1. Reinhold Ludwig, RF circuit design, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall 2014, ISBN: 978-
0131471375
2. David. M. Pozar, Microwave engineering, 4th edition, John Wiley, 2011, ISBN: 978-
0470631553.
3. Devendra K. Misra, “Radio-Frequency and microwave communication circuits
analysis and design”, 2nd edition, University of Wisconsin-Mulwaukee, A John Wiley
& Sons Publication

References
1. B. Bhat, S. K Koul, “Stripline like transmission lines for Microwave Integrated
Circuits”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd Publishers, 2007.
2. I.J.Bahl & P.Bhartia, “Microwave Solid state Circuit Design (2/e)”, Wiley, 2003.
3. Matthew M. Radmanesh, Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics Illustrated,
Prentice Hall, 2012
4. S.Y.Liao, “Microwave Circuit Analysis and Amplifier Design”, Prentice-Hall, 1986.
5. G. Mathaei, L young, E.M.T. Jones, “Microwave filters, Impedance-Matching
networks and Coupling structures”, Artech House Books.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 100 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the basics of Scattering matrix and two port characterization and
importance of matching circuits.
CO2 Analyze the working principles of couplers, power dividers etc. and their design.
CO3 Design the different types of MIC filters and their implementation.
CO4 Understand the complexities of microwave amplifier design and its stability features.
CO5 Analyze and appreciate the design principles of microwave oscillators.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 101 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE52

Course Title : Introduction to Machine Learning
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content
Statistical Decision Theory - Regression, Classification, Bias Variance, Linear Regression,
Multivariate Regression, Subset Selection, Shrinkage Methods, Principal Component
Regression, Partial Least squares

Linear Classification, Logistic Regression, Linear Discriminant Analysis, Perceptron, Support

Vector Machines, Neural Networks - Introduction, Early Models, Perceptron Learning,
Backpropagation, Initialization, Training & Validation, Parameter Estimation - MLE, MAP,
Bayesian Estimation

Decision Trees, Regression Trees, Stopping Criterion & Pruning loss functions, Categorical
Attributes, Multiway Splits, Missing Values, Decision Trees - Instability Evaluation Measures,
Bootstrapping & Cross Validation, Class Evaluation Measures, ROC curve, MDL, Ensemble
Methods - Bagging, Committee Machines and Stacking, Boosting

Gradient Boosting, Random Forests, Multi-class Classification, Naive Bayes, Bayesian

Networks, Undirected Graphical Models, HMM, Variable Elimination, Belief Propagation,
Partitional Clustering, Hierarchical Clustering, Birch Algorithm, CURE Algorithm, Density-
based Clustering,

Gaussian Mixture Models, Expectation Maximization, Learning Theory, Introduction to

Reinforcement Learning

References
1. The Elements of Statistical Learning, by Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome H.
Friedman
2. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, by Christopher Bishop
3. Machine Learning: A Bayesian and Optimization Perspective by Sergios Theodoridis
4. C229 Machine learning lecture notes, Stanford university by Andrew NG

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand various regression and classification algorithms
CO2 Develop machine learning algorithms for practical applications
CO3 Basic Neural networks and back propagation.
CO4 Develop an intuition about the bias variance trade-off
CO5 Introduction to reinforcement learning and Unsupervised learning

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 102 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE53

Course Title : Deep Learning
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content
Machine learning, Introduction to Deep learning, McCulloch Pitts Neuron, Thresholding Logic,
Perceptrons, Perceptron Learning Algorithm and Convergence, Multilayer Perceptrons
(MLPs), Representation Power of MLPs, Sigmoid Neurons, Gradient Descent, Feedforward
Neural Networks, Representation Power of Feedforward Neural Networks.

Gradient Descent (GD), Momentum Based GD, Nesterov Accelerated GD, Stochastic GD,
AdaGrad, RMSProp, Adam, Regularization, Bias Variance Tradeoff, L2 regularization, Early
stopping, Dataset augmentation, Parameter sharing and tying, Injecting noise at input,
Ensemble methods, Dropout.

Greedy Layer wise Pre-training, activation functions, weight initialization methods, Batch
Normalization, Convolutional Neural Networks, LeNet, AlexNet, ZF-Net, VGGNet,
GoogLeNet, ResNet

Recurrent Neural Networks, Backpropagation Through Time (BPTT), Vanishing and

Exploding Gradients, Truncated BPTT, Gated Recurrent Units (GRUs), Long Short-Term
Memory (LSTM) Cells, Solving the vanishing gradient problem with LSTMs

Encoder Decoder Models, Attention Mechanism, Attention over images, Hierarchical

Attention, Multi-headed Self Attention, Cross Attention, Autoencoders

References
1. Ian Goodfellow and Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville. Deep Learning. An MIT
Press book. 2016.
2. Charu C. Aggarwal. Neural Networks and Deep Learning: A Textbook. Springer.
2019.
3. Dive into Deep Learning

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Study the basic feedforward neural network and backpropagation algorithm
CO2 Understanding the various regularization approached used in deep learning
CO3 Understand the Convolutional neural networks
CO4 Understand the recurrent neural networks
CO5 Develop an intuition about attention and encoder decoder architecture

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 103 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE54

Course Title : CONTROL SYSTEMS
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce the components and their representation of control systems
CLO2 To learn various methods for analyzing the time response, frequency response
and stability of the systems.
CLO3 To learn the various approach for the state variable analysis.

Course Content
Control System: Terminology and Basic Structure-Feed forward and Feedback control theory,
Electrical and Mechanical Transfer Function Models-Block diagram Models-Signal flow graphs
models-DC and AC servo Systems-Synchronous -Multivariable control system

Transient response-steady state response-Measures of performance of the standard first

order and second order system-effect on an additional zero and an additional pole-steady
error constant and system- type number-PID control-Analytical design for PD, PI, PID control
systems

Closed loop frequency response-Performance specification in frequency domain-Frequency

response of standard second order system- Bode Plot - Polar Plot- Nyquist Plots-Design of
compensators using Bode Plots-Cascade lead compensation-Cascade lag compensation-
Cascade lag-lead compensation

Concept of stability-Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability-Routh stability criterion-

Relative stability-Root locus concept-Guidelines for sketching root locus-Nyquist stability
criterion.

State variable representation-Conversion of state variable models to transfer functions-

Conversion of transfer functions to state variable models-Solution of state equations-Concepts
of Controllability and Observability-Stability of linear systems-Equivalence between transfer
function and state variable representations-State variable analysis of digital control system-
Digital control design using state feedback.

Text Book
1. M. Gopal, “Control System – Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition,
2012.

References
1. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers, 5th Edition, 2007.
2. K.Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI, 5th Edition, 2012.
3. S.K.Bhattacharya, “Control System Engineering”, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2013.
4. Benjamin.C.Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th
Edition,1995.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 104 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Compute the transfer function of different physical systems.
CO2 Analyse the time domain specification and calculate the steady state error.
CO3 Illustrate the frequency response characteristics of open loop and closed loop
system response.
CO4 Analyse the stability using Routh and root locus techniques.
CO5 Illustrate the state space model of a physical system and discuss the concepts of
sampled data control system.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 105 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE55

Course Title : ADVANCED TOPICS IN 5G/B5G WIRELESS
COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC22 - Wireless Communication
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Objective of this course is to help students get familiarized with the latest
advancements in 5G and B5G Wireless Communications.

Course Content
I. Introduction: 5G New radio frame structure, Numerology, Standardization, Review of
orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, Review of multiple input multiple output systems.

II. Waveforms: Orthogonal time frequency space, non-orthogonal multiple access, Index
modulation, Spatial modulation, intelligent reflecting surface, full duplex, physical layer
security.

III. mmWAVE and massive MIMO: Spectrum, Beamforming, Angle of arrival, Angle of
departure, Channel model, Precoding, Massive MIMO with imperfect CSI, Multi cell massive
MIMO, Imperfect CSI, Pilot Contamination, Channel Estimation

IV. Ultra Dense Networks: Poisson point Process, Device-to-Device Networks, Femtocells,
Macro cells, Heterogeneous networks, Coverage, Rate of cellular networks.

V. Coding: Low density parity check code, Log likelihood ratio, soft input soft output decoder,
Rate matching, Puncturing, Polar code, successive cancellation decoding of polar codes.

Text Book
1. “5G NR: The Next Generation Wireless Access Technology”, Erik Dahlman, Stefan
Parkvall, Johan Skold, Elsevier, 2E, 2020
2. “5G Physical Layer: Principals, Models and Technology Components”, Ali Zaidi, et
al., Academic Press, 2018.
3. “Large MIMO Systems”, A Chockalingam, B Sundar Rajan, Cambridge University
Press, 2014.

References
1. “Delay Doppler Communications -Principles and Applications”, Yi Hong et al.,
Elsevier, 2022.
2. “OTFS - Orthogonal Time Frequency Space Modulation-A waveform for 6G”, Surva
Sekhar Das, Ramjee Prasad, River Publishers Series in Communication, 2021.
3. “LDPC Coded Modulations”, M. Franceschini et al., Springer, 2009
4. Massive MIMO Networks-Spectral, Energy and Hardware Efficiency”, E.Bjornson et
al., NOW Publishers, 2017
5. “Millimetre Wave Communications”, M.G. Sache, MDPI Publishers, 2020
6. “Stochastic Geometry Analysis of Cellular Networks”, B Blaszczyszyn et al.,
Cambridge University

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 106 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Students will learn about the different 5G Modulation Waveforms.
CO2 Students will learn about 5G Numerology, Frame structure.
CO3 Students will learn about mmwave, beamforming and massive MIMO systems.
CO4 Students will learn to analyze ultra dense networks, derive coverage, rate of
heterogeneous networks.
CO5 Students will learn about LDPC and polar codes.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 107 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECPE56

Course Title : Analog Power Integrated Circuits
Type of Course : PE
Prerequisites : ECPC11 Network Analysis and Synthesis
ECPC17 Electronic Circuits
ECPC21 Analog Integrated Circuits
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand and design power management integrated circuits such as voltage
& current references, low-dropout regulators, and DC-DC converters.
CLO2 To understand the design challenges of state-of-the-art power management unit
(PMU) designed for IoT and RF applications.

Course Content
Introduction to switching and linear regulators, energy sources and load circuits, package
thermal constraints, regulator performance parameters, on-chip device process variations and
mismatch.

Current and voltage reference circuits: Beta multiplier current reference operating in saturation
and sub-threshold region, power supply rejection ratio (PSRR) of current reference,
complementary to absolute temperature (CTAT) current reference, peaking current source,
temperature independent (I) reference. Bandgap voltage reference (BGR), voltage trimming,
curvature correction, and PSRR improvement techniques, MOSFET only sub-threshold
region-based voltage reference circuits (CVR), analysis and simulation methods.

Low drop-out voltage regulators (LDO): Linear regulator, NMOS & PMOS pass-FET LDO
circuits, DC and AC analysis, small signal model and stability analysis, internally and externally
compensated LDOs, PSRR analysis, load and line transient analysis.

Inductive DC-DC/Switching converters: Power stage and fundamental concepts, steady state
operation, volt-second balance principle, ripple current and voltage magnitude, CCM Vs DCM
operation, line and load transient response, small signal model, loop gain and stability
analysis, dominant pole (type-I), type-II, and type-III compensation, power-FET loss
components and optimal sizing methodology, DC-DC converter loss components and
efficiency calculation.

Course project: Design to GDS analog tape out flow, design project involving specification to
design, schematic, layout, and post-layout extraction of voltage and current reference circuits,
LDO, power-FET and DC-DC converters in a 65nm CMOS process.

Text Book
1. Bernhard Wicht, "Design of Power Management Integrated Circuits", Wiley-IEEE
Press, 2024.
2. Ke-Horng Chen, "Power Management Techniques for Integrated Circuit Design",
Wiley-IEEE Press, 2016.

References
1. Mona M. Hella, Patrick Mercier, "Power Management Integrated Circuits", CRC
Press, 2016.
2. "Power Topologies Handbook", Texas Instruments.
3. Selected papers from IEEExplore (https://ieeexplore.ieee.org/Xplore/home.jsp).

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 108 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 understand the power management unit specifications for given target applications.
CO2 understand and analyze the performance of power management integrated circuits.
CO3 appreciate the challenges involved in the design of a high-performance PMU design.
CO4 design various types of voltage & current references, LDO’s, and DC-DC converters.
CO5 design high efficiency on-chip power management circuits.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 109 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

OPEN ELECTIVES (PE)

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 110 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE10

Course Title : MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of microwave electron beam devices and their
applications in X band frequency.

Course Content
Design and realization of power dividers, hybrids, directional couplers etc using strip lines and
micro strip lines.

Filter design; Kuroda identities. K and J inverters. Filter transformations. Realization using strip
lines and micro strip lines.

Transistor amplifiers; Power gain equations. Stability considerations. Analysis. Design using
MICs.
Transistor oscillators. Active devices for microwave oscillators. Three port S parameter
characterization of transistors. Oscillation and stability conditions.

Diode mixers. Mixer design. Single ended mixer. Balanced mixer. Image rejection mixer.
Phase shifter design. PIN diode. Phase shifter.

Text Book
1. I.J.Bahl & Bhartia, Microwave Solid State Circuit Design, Wiley, 1987.
2. G.D.Vendelin, Design of Amplifiers and Oscillators by the S Parameter Method,
Wiley, 1982.

References
1. Stripline-like Transmission Lines for Microwave Integrated Circuits - Bharathi Bhat,
Shiban Koul, New Age International(P) Limited, Publishers, 2007
2. Microwave Engineering, David M Pozar, John Wiley & Sons,In International Student
Edition
3. T.C.Edwards, Foundations for Microstrip Circuit Design (2/e), Wiley, 1992.
4. Recent literature in Microwave Integrated Circuit Design.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 the topics will make students design of the important and essential M.I.C
components
CO2 Filter is the most needed circuit for many applications and the unit will make the
student confident in filter design
CO3 All aspects and different parameters, design factors and properties will me made
thorough
CO4 One will be confident to handle any oscillator design
CO5 The student will become familiar and confident in the design of Mixers, the other
essential circuits.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 111 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE11

Course Title : RF MEMS CIRCUIT
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of MEMS and their applications in RF circuit
design.

Course Content
Introduction to Micromachining Processes. RF MEMS relays and switches. Switch
parameters. Actuation mechanisms. Bi-stable relays and micro actuators. Dynamics of
switching operation.

MEMS inductors and capacitors. Micro machined inductor. Effect of inductor layout. Modeling
and design issues of planar inductor. Gap-tuning and area-tuning capacitors. Dielectric
tunable capacitors.

MEMS phase shifters. Types. Limitations. Switched delay lines. Fundamentals of RF MEMS
Filters. Micro machined transmission lines. Coplanar lines. Micro machined directional coupler
and mixer.

Micro machined antennas. Micro strip antennas –design parameters. Micromachining to

improve performance. Reconfigurable antennas.

Text Book
1. Vijay.K.Varadanetal, “RF MEMS and their Applications”, Wiley-India, 2011.

References
1. H.J.D.Santos, “RF MEMS Circuit Design for Wireless Communications”, Artech
House, 2002.
2. G.M.Rebeiz, “RF MEMS Theory, Design, and Technology”, Wiley, 2003.
3. Recent literature in RF MEMS Circuit Design.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 learn the Micromachining Processes
CO2 learn the design and applications of RF MEMS inductors and capacitors.
CO3 learn about RF MEMS Filters and RF MEMS Phase Shifters.
CO4 learn about the suitability of micro machined transmission lines for RF MEMS
CO5 learn about the Micro machined Antennas and Reconfigurable Antennas

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 112 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE12

Course Title : HIGH SPEED SYSTEM DESIGN
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to all aspects of electronic packaging including electrical,
thermal, mechanical and reliability issues.

Course Content
Functions of an Electronic Package, Packaging Hierarchy, IC packaging: MEMS packaging,
consumer electronics packaging, medical electronics packaging, Trends, Challenges, Driving
Forces on Packaging Technology, Materials for Microelectronic packaging, Packaging
Material Properties, Ceramics, Polymers, and Metals in Packaging, Material for high density
interconnect substrates

Overview of Transmission line theory, Clock Distribution, Noise Sources, power Distribution,
signal distribution, EMI; crosstalk and non-ideal effects; signal integrity: impact of packages,
via, traces, connectors; non-ideal return current paths, high frequency power delivery,
simultaneous switching noise; system-level timing analysis and budgeting; methodologies for
design of high-speed buses; radiated emissions and minimizing system noise.

Electrical Anatomy of Systems Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power Distribution,

Electromagnetic Interference, Design Process Electrical Design: Interconnect Capacitance,
Resistance and Inductance fundamentals; Transmission Lines, Clock Distribution, Noise
Sources, power Distribution, signal distribution, EMI, Digital and RF Issues. Processing
Technologies, Thin Film deposition, Patterning, Metal to metal joining.

IC Assembly – Purpose, Requirements, Technologies, Wire bonding, Tape Automated

Bonding, Flip Chip, Wafer Level Packaging, reliability, wafer level burn – in and test. Single
chip packaging: functions, types, materials processes, properties, characteristics, trends.
Multi-chip packaging: types, design, comparison, trends. Passives: discrete, integrated, and
embedded –encapsulation and sealing: fundamentals, requirements, materials, processes

Printed Circuit Board: Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard fabrication, Micro via
Boards. Board Assembly: Surface Mount Technology, Through Hole Technology, Process
Control and Design challenges. Thermal Management, Heat transfer fundamentals, Thermal
conductivity and resistance, Conduction, convection and radiation – Cooling requirements.

Reliability, Basic concepts, Environmental interactions. Thermal mismatch and fatigue –

failures – thermo mechanically induced – electrically induced – chemically induced. Electrical
Testing: System level electrical testing, Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing, Design
for Testability.

Text Book
1. Tummala, Rao R., Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging, McGraw Hill, 2001
2. Howard Johnson, Martin Graham, High Speed Digital Design: A Handbook of Black
Magic, Prentice Hall, 1993

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 113 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

References
1. Blackwell (Ed), The electronic packaging handbook, CRC Press, 2000.
2. Tummala, Rao R, Microelectronics packaging handbook, McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Bosshart, Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology,TataMcGraw Hill, 1988.
4. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, Electronic Product design, Wiley India, 2011
5. R.S.Khandpur, Printed Circuit Board, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005
6. Recent literature in Electronic Packaging.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Design of PCBs which minimize the EMI and operate at higher frequency.
CO2 Enable design of packages which can withstand higher temperature, vibrations and
shock.
CO3 Explain the basic techniques for statistical process control and failure mode and
effect analysis.
CO4 Prescribe and perform parametric test and analysis and the troubleshooting of
electronic circuits with the application of basic and virtual electronic instruments.
CO5 Explain contemporary pragmatic manufacturing processes, interconnects and
assembly methods for electronic equipment fabrication.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 114 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE13

Course Title : DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The purpose of this course is to explain how DSP techniques could be used for
solving problems in speech communication.

Course Content
Speech production model-1D sound waves-functional block of the Vocal tract model –Linear
predictive co- efficient (LPC) -Auto-correlation method-Levinson-Durbin Algorithm-Auto-co-
variance method-Lattice Structure-Computation of Lattice co-efficient from LPC-Phonetic
Representation of speech-Perception of Loudness - Critical bands – Pitch perception –
Auditory masking.

Feature extraction of the speech signal: Endpoint Detection-Dynamic time warping- Pitch
frequency estimation: Autocorrelation approach- Homomorphic Approach-Formant frequency
estimation using vocal tract model and Homomorphic Approach-Linear predictive co-efficient
-Poles of the vocal tract-Reflection co-efficient-Log Area ratio.

Cepstrum- Line spectral frequencies- Functional blocks of the ear- Mel frequency cepstral co-
efficient- Spectrogram-Time resolution versus frequency resolution-Discrete wavelet
transformation.

Pattern recognition for speech detection: Back-propagation Neural Network-Support Vector

Machine- Hidden Markov Model (HMM)-Gaussian Mixture Model (GMM) -Unsupervised
Learning system: K-Means and Fuzzy K-means clustering - Kohonen self-organizing map-
Dimensionality reduction techniques: Principle component analysis (PCA), Linear discriminate
analysis (LDA), Kernel-LDA (KLDA), Independent component analysis (ICA).

Non-uniform quantization for Gaussian distributed data- Adaptive Quantization-Differential

pulse code modulation- Code Exited Linear prediction (CELP)-Quality assessment of the
compressed speech signal Text to Speech (TTS) analysis –Evolution of speech synthesis
systems-Unit selection methods - TTS Applications.

Text Book
1. L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schafer,” Introduction to Digital speech processing”, now
publishers USA,2007
2. E.S.Gopi,”Digital speech processing using matlab”, Springer, 2014.

References
1. L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schafer,”Digital processing of speech signals”,
PrenticeHall,1978
2. T.F.Quatieri, ”Discrete-time Speech Signal Processing”, Prentice-Hall, PTR,2001
3. L.Hanzaetal, “Voice Compression and Communications”, Wiley/ IEEE, 2001.
4. Recent literature in Digital speech processing.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 115 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 illustrate how the speech production is modeled
CO2 summarize the various techniques involved in collecting the features from the
speech signal in both time and frequency domain
CO3 summarize the functional blocks of the ear
CO4 compare the various pattern recognition techniques involved in speech and speaker
detection
CO5 summarize the various speech compression techniques

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 116 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE14

Course Title : DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To treat the 2D systems as an extension of 1D system design and discuss
techniques specific to 2D systems.

Course Content
Linearity and space-invariance. PSF, Discrete images and image transforms, 2-D sampling
and reconstruction, Image quantization, 2-D transforms and properties.

Image enhancement- Histogram modeling, equalization and modification. Image smoothing,

Image crispening. Spatial filtering, Replication and zooming, Generalized cepstrum and
homomorphic filtering.

Image restoration- image observation models. Inverse and Wiener filtering. Filtering using
image transforms. Constrained least-squares restoration. Generalized inverse, SVD and
interactive methods. Recursive filtering. Maximum entropy restoration. Bayesian methods.

Image data compression- sub sampling, coarse quantization and frame repetition. Pixel coding
- PCM, entropy coding, run length coding Bit-plane coding. Predictive coding. Transform
coding of images. Hybrid coding and vector DPCM. Inter-frame hybrid coding.

Image analysis- applications, Spatial and transform features. Edge detection, boundary
extraction, AR models and region representation. Moments as features. Image structure.
Morphological operations and transforms. Texture. Scene matching and detection.
Segmentation and classification.

Text Book
1. A.K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI, 1995.
2. R.C.Gonzalez & R.E. Woods,” Digital Image Processing”, (2/e), Pearson, 2002.

References
1. J.C. Russ, “The Image Processing Handbook”, (5/e), CRC, 2006.
2. E.S.Gopi, ''Digital Image processing using Matlab'', Scitech publications, 2006.
3. Recent literature in Digital Image processing

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 analyze the need for image transforms, types and their properties.
CO2 become skilled at different techniques employed for the enhancement of images
both in spatial and frequency domain
CO3 explore causes for image degradation and to teach various restoration techniques.
CO4 evaluate the image compression techniques in spatial and frequency domain.
CO5 gain knowledge of feature extraction techniques for image analysis and recognition.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 117 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE15

Course Title : PATTERN RECOGNITION
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The subject aims to make the students to understand the mathematical approach
for pattern recognition.

Course Content
Polynomial curve fitting – The curse of dimensionality - Decision theory - Information theory -
The beta distribution - Dirichlet distribution-Gaussian distribution-The exponent family:
Maximum likelihood and sufficient statistics -non-parametric method: kernel-density
estimators - Nearest Neighbour methods.

Linear models for regression and classification: Linear basis function models for regression -
Bias variance decomposition-Bayesian linear regression-Discriminant functions - Fisher’s
linear discriminant analysis (LDA) - Principal Component Analysis (PCA) - Probabilistic
generative model - Probabilistic discriminative model.

Kernel methods: Dual Representations-Constructing Kernels-Radial basis function networks-

Gaussian Process-Maximum margin classifier (Support Vector Machine) –Relevance Vector
Machines-Kernel-PCA, Kernel-LDA.

Mixture models: K-means clustering - Mixtures of Gaussian - Expectation-Maximization

algorithm- Sequential models: Markov model, Hidden-Markov Model (HMM) - Linear
Dynamical Systems (LDS).

Neural networks: Feed- forward Network functions functions-Network training - Error Back
propagation - The Hessian Matrix - Regularization in Neural Network - Mixture density
networks – Bayesian Neural Networks

Text Book
1. C.M.Bishop,''Pattern recognition and machine learning'', Springer,2006
2. E.S.Gopi, “Pattern recognition and Computational intelligence using Matlab,
Transactions on computational science and computational intelligence, Springer,
2019

References
1. Sergious Thedorodis ,Konstantinos Koutroumbas, Pattern recognition, Elsevier,
Fourth edition,2009
2. Richard O.Duda, Peter.E.Hart, David G.Stork, “Pattern classification”, Wiley, Second
edition,2016
3. Recent literature in the related topics

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 118 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 summarize the various techniques involved in pattern recognition
CO2 identify the suitable pattern recognition techniques for the particular applications.
CO3 categorize the various pattern recognition techniques into supervised and
unsupervised.
CO4 summarize the mixture models-based pattern recognition techniques
CO5 summarize the artificial neural network-based pattern recognition techniques

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 119 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE16

Course Title : COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND
ORGANIZATION
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand how computers are constructed out of a set of functional units and
how the functional units operate, interact, and communicate.
CLO2 To make the students to understand the concept of interfacing memory and
various I/O devices to a computer system using a suitable bus system.

Course Content
Introduction: Function and structure of a computer, Functional components of a Computer,
Interconnection of components, Performance of a computer.

Representation of Instructions: Machine instructions, Memory locations & Addresses,

Operands, addressing modes, Instruction formats, Instruction sets, Instruction set
architectures - CISC and RISC architectures, Super scalar Architectures, Fixed point and
floating-point operations.

Basic Processing Unit: Fundamental concepts, ALU, Control unit, Multiple bus organization,
Hardwired control, Micro programmed control, Pipelining, Data hazards, Instruction hazards,
Influence on instruction sets, Data path and control considerations, Performance
considerations.

Memory organization: Basic concepts, Semiconductor RAM memories, ROM, Speed - Size
and cost, Memory Interfacing circuits, Cache memory, improving cache performance, Memory
management unit, Shared/Distributed Memory, Cache coherency in multiprocessor,
Segmentation, Paging, Concept of virtual memory, Address translation, Secondary storage
devices.

I/O Organization: Accessing I/O devices, Input/output programming, Interrupts, Exception

Handling, DMA, Buses, I/O interfaces- Serial port, Parallel port, PCI bus, SCSI bus, USB bus,
Firewall and Infinity band, I/O peripherals.

Text Book
1. C.Hamacher Z. Vranesic S. Zaky and Manjikian, "Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems", 6 th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. W. Stallings, "Computer Organization and Architecture - Designing for Performance",
8Th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.

References
1. B,Parhami, “Computer Architecture, From Microprocessors to Supercomputers,”
Oxford University Press, Reprint 2014.
2. J. L. Hennessy and D. A. Patterson, "Computer Architecture, A Quantitative
Approach”, 5 th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann,2012.
3. J.P. Hayes, "Computer Architecture and Organization", 3 rd Edition, McGraw-Hill,
1998.
4. Recent literature in Computer Architecture and Organization.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 120 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 apply the basic knowledge of digital concept to the functional components of a
Computer System.
CO2 analyze the addressing mode concepts and design the instruction set Architecture.
CO3 identify the functions of various processing units within the CPU of a Computer
System.
CO4 analyze the function of the memory management unit and create suitable memory
interface to the CPU.
CO5 recognize the need for recent Bus standards and I/O devices.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 121 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE17

Course Title : OPERATING SYSTEMS
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the principles and practice of operating system design and to illustrate
the current design practices using DOS and UNIX operating systems.

Course Content
Types of operating systems, Different views of the operating system, Principles of Design and
Implementation. The process and threads. System programmer’s view of processes,
Operating system's views of processes, Operating system services for process management.
Process scheduling, Schedulers, Scheduling algorithms. Overview of Linux operating system.

Inter process synchronization, Mutual exclusion algorithms, Hardware support, Semaphores,

Concurrent programming using semaphores.

Conditional critical regions, Monitors, Inter process communication: Messages, Pipes.

Deadlocks: Characterization. Prevention. Avoidance. Detection and recovery. Combined
approach to deadlock handling.

Contiguous allocation. Static and dynamic partitioned memory allocation. Segmentation. Non-
contiguous allocation. Paging, Hardware support, Virtual Memory.

Need for files. File abstraction. File naming. File system organization. File system optimization.
Reliability. Security and protection. I/O management and disk scheduling. Recent trends and
developments.

Text Book
1. Gary: Operating Systems- A modern Perspective, (2/e), Addison Wesley, 2000.
2. M. Milenkovic: Operating systems, Concepts and Design, McGraw Hill, 1992.

References
1. C. Crowley: Operating Systems, Irwin, 1997.
2. J.l. Peterson & A.S. Chatz: Operating System Concepts, Addison Wesley, 1985.
3. W. Stallings: Operating Systems, (2/e), Prentice Hall, 1995.
4. Mattuck,A., Introduction to Analysis, Prentice-Hall,1998.
5. Recent literature in Operating Systems.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the different types of Operating systems and scheduling algorithms.
CO2 Understand the synchronization algorithms and semaphores.
CO3 Appreciate the inter process communication and dead lock handling.
CO4 Critically evaluate the different memory allocation techniques.
CO5 Appreciate the importance of file system organization, I/O management and disk
scheduling.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 122 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE18

Course Title : WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : ECPE10
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To overview the various design issues and challenges in the layered architecture
of Wireless sensor networks

Course Content
Motivation for a network of wireless sensor nodes-Definitions and background-challenges and constraints for
wireless sensor networks-Applications. Node architecture-sensing subsystems, processing Subsystems,
Communication interfaces, Prototypes.

Physical layer- Introduction, wireless channel and communication fundamentals – frequency allocation, modulation
and demodulation, wave propagation effects and noise, channels models, spread spectrum communication, packet
transmission and synchronization, quality of wireless channels and measures for improvement, physical layer and
transceiver design consideration in wireless sensor networks, Energy usage profile, choice of modulation, Power
Management

Data link layer- Fundamentals of wireless MAC protocols, Characteristics of MAC protocol in wireless sensor
networks contention-based protocols, Contention free MAC protocols, Hybrid MAC protocols

Network layer-routing metrics-Flooding and gossiping, Data centric routing, proactive routing on demand routing,
hierarchical routing, Location based routing, QOS based routing. Data Aggregation – Various aggregation
techniques.

Case study-Target detection tracking, Habitat monitoring, Environmental disaster monitoring, Practical
implementation issues, IEEE 802.15.4 low rate WPAN, Operating System Design Issues. Simulation tools.

Text Book
1. W. Dargie, C. Poellabauer, ”Fundamentals of Wireless sensor networks-Theory and
Practice”, John Wiley & Sons Publication2010
2. K. Sohraby, D.Minoli and T.Znati, “Wireless Sensor Network Technology- Protocols
and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

References
1. F.Zhao, L.Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks: an information processing approach”,
Elsevier publication, 2004.
2. C.S.Raghavendra Krishna, M.Sivalingam and Taribznati, “Wireless Sensor
Networks”, Springer publication, 2004.
3. H. Karl, A.willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John
Wiley publication, Jan2006.
4. K.Akkaya and M.Younis, “A Survey of routing protocols in wireless sensor networks”,
Elsevier Adhoc Network Journal, Vol.3, no.3, pp. 325-349, 2005.
5. Philip Levis, “TinyOS Programming”, 2006 –www.tinyos.net.
6. I.F. Akyildiz, W. Su, Sankarasubramanian, E. Cayirci, “Wireless sensor networks:
a survey”, computer networks, Elsevier, 2002, 394 -422.
7. Jamal N. Al-karaki, Ahmed E. Kamal, “Routing Techniques in Wireless sensor
networks: A survey”, IEEE wireless communication, December 2004, 6 –28.
8. Recent literature in Wireless Sensor Networks.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 123 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 analyze the challenges and constraints of wireless sensor network and its
subsystems
CO2 examine the physical layer specification, modulation and transceiver design
considerations
CO3 analyze the protocols used at the MAC layer and scheduling mechanisms
CO4 compare and analyse the types of routing protocols and data aggregation
techniques
CO5 identify the application areas and practical implementation issues.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 124 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE19

Course Title : ARM SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The objective of this course is to give the students a thorough exposure to ARM
architecture and make the students to learn the ARM programming & Thumb
programming models.

Course Content
RISC machine. ARM programmer’s model. ARM Instruction Set. Assembly level language
programming. Development tools.

ARM organization. ARM instruction execution. ARM implementation. ARM coprocessor

interface. Flynn's Taxonomy, SIMD and Vector Processors, Vector Floating Point Processor
(VFP), VFP and ARM interactions, vector operation.

Floating point architecture. Expressions. Conditional statements. Loops. Functions and

procedures. Run time environment. Interrupt response. Interrupt processing. Interrupt
Handling schemes, Examples of Interrupt Handlers.

Thumb programmer’s model. Thumb Instruction set. Thumb implementation. AMBA Overview,
Typical AMAB Based Microcontroller, AHB bus features, AHB Bus transfers, APB bus
transfers and APB Bridge.

Memory hierarchy. Architectural support for operating system. Memory size and speed. Cache
memory management. Operating system. ARM processor chips. Features of Raspberry Pi
and its applications.

Text Book
1. S. Furber, “ARM System Architecture”, Addison-Wesley, 1996.
2. Sloss, D.Symes & C.Wright, “ARM system Developer’s Guide-Designing and
Optimizing System Software”, Elsevier.2005.

References
1. Technical reference manual for ARM processor cores, including Cortex, ARM 11,
ARM 9 & ARM 7 processor families.
2. User guides and reference manuals for ARM software development and modelling
tools. David Seal, ARM Architecture Reference Manual, Addison-Wesley.
3. The Definitive Guide to ARM® Cortex®-M3 and Cortex®-M4 Processors, Third
Edition by Joseph Yiu, Elsevier 2015
4. Recent literature in ARM System Architecture.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 125 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 understand the programmer’s model of ARM processor and test the assembly
level programming.
CO2 analyze various types of coprocessors and design suitable co-processor interface
to ARM processor.
CO3 analyze floating point processor architecture and its architectural support for higher
level language.
CO4 become aware of the Thumb mode of operation of ARM.
CO5 identify the architectural support of ARM for operating system and analyze the
function of memory Management unit of ARM.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 126 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE20

Course Title : LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : ECPC23
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the low voltage device modelling, low voltage, low power
VLSI CMOS circuit design.

Course Content
CMOS fabrication process, Shallow trench isolation. Lightly-doped drain. Buried channel.
Fabrication process of BiCMOS and SOI CMOS technologies.

Modeling of CMOS devices parameters. Threshold voltage, Body effect, short channel and
Narrow channel effects, Electron temperature, and MOS capacitance.

CMOS inverters, static logic circuits of CMOS, pass transistor, BiCMOS, SOI CMOS and low
power CMOS techniques.

Basic concepts of dynamic logic circuits. Various problems associated with dynamic logic
circuits. Differential, BiCMOS and low voltage dynamic logic circuits.

CMOS memory circuits, Decoders, sense amplifiers, SRAM architecture. Low voltage SRAM
techniques.

Text Book
1. Jan Rabaey,”Low Power Design Essentials (Integrated Circuits and Systems)”,
Springer,2009
2. J.B.Kuo&J.H.Lou,”Low-voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, Wiley, 1999.

References
1. A. Bellaowar & M.I.Elmasry,”Low power Digital VLSI Design, Circuits and Systems”,
Kluwer, 1996.
2. Recent literature in Low Power VLSI Circuits.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 acquire the knowledge about various CMOS fabrication process and its modeling.
CO2 infer about the second order effects of MOS transistor characteristics.
CO3 analyze and implement various CMOS static logic circuits.
CO4 learn the design of various CMOS dynamic logic circuits.
CO5 learn the different types of memory circuits and their design.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 127 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE21

Course Title : COMPUTER VISION AND MACHINE LEARNING
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Be familiar with the theoretical aspects of computing with images;
CLO2 Describe the foundation of image formation, measurement, and analysis;

Course Content
Computer Vision and Computer Graphics, Computer Vision - Low-level, Mid-level, High-level,
Diverse Computer Vision Applications: Document Image Analysis, Biometrics, Object
Recognition, Tracking, Medical Image Analysis, Content-Based Image Retrieval, Video Data
Processing.

Segmentation -Object Recognition, Activity Recognition, and Gesture Recognition - Image

features: Color, Shape, Texture Shape orientation descriptors – SIFT, SURF, Viola Jones
Feature detectors, Harris. Integral Histogram.

Adaboost: concept of ensemble of classifiers; basic algorithm; case study- Face detection
Artificial Immune Systems Fuzzy belief networks, Evolving belief networks Bayesian belief
networks Evolutionary and swarm-based neural networks.

Machine learning: classification, Machine learning: clustering, Machine learning: classification.

Logistic regression Bayesian logistic regression Non-linear logistic regression Dual logistic
regression Kernel logistic regression, Incremental fitting and boosting.

Reinforcement learning - Classification trees- multi-class logistic regression Random trees,

Random forests, Applications. Introduction to Deep Learning.

Text Book
1. Richard Szeliski, “Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications”, Springer, 2010.
2. D. Forsyth and J. Ponce, "Computer Vision - A modern approach”, Prentice Hall,
2002.

References
1. Richard Hartley and Andrew Zisser man, Multiple view geometry in computer vision
2nd edition, Cambridge University press, 2004.
2. E Davies, “Computer and Machine Vision, Algorithms, Practicalities”, 4th Edition,
Elsevier, 2012.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 learn the basics of computer vision.
CO2 learn the vision features.
CO3 understand issue of segmentation in computer vision algorithms.
CO4 study the basics of Machine learning.
CO5 know the design of Deep learning architectures.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 128 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE22

Course Title : TEXT DATA MINING
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : None
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand the role played by text mining in Information retrieval and extraction.

Course Content
Data, information and knowledge, Models of knowledge representation information retrieval
and data mining -relevance, association rules, and knowledge discovery. Conceptual models
of an information retrieval and knowledge discovery system.

Information extraction- prediction and evaluation-Textual information to numerical vectors -

Types and tokens, Document similarity Vector space models, TF-IDF weighting Indexing,
Boolean search Evaluation of IR systems Ranked retrieval Relevance feedback.

Text Categorization – Definition – Document Representation –Feature Selection - Decision

Tree Classifiers - Rule-based Classifiers - Probabilistic and Naive Bayes Classifiers - Linear
Classifiers- Clustering –Definition- Distance-based Algorithms- Word and Phrase-based
Clustering -Semi-Supervised Clustering - Transfer Learning. Naive Bayes - k Nearest Neigh
bor (kNN) - Logistic Regression-Decision Trees. Connectivity-based clustering and centroid-
based clustering.

Probabilistic Models for Text Mining -Mixture Models - Stochastic Processes in Bayesian
Nonparametric Models - Graphical Models - Relationship Between Clustering, Dimension
Reduction and Topic Modelling - Latent Semantic Indexing - Probabilistic Latent Semantic
Indexing -Latent Dirichlet Allocation- Probabilistic Document Clustering and Topic Models -
Probabilistic Models for Information Extraction - Hidden Markov Models- Maximal Entropy
Modelling - Maximal Entropy Markov Models -Conditional Random Fields.

Visualization Approaches - Architectural Considerations - Visualization Techniques in Link

Analysis - Example- Mining Text Streams - Text Mining in Multimedia - Text Analytics in social
media - Opinion Mining and Sentiment Analysis - Document Sentiment Classification Aspect-
Based Sentiment Analysis - Opinion Spam Detection – Text Mining Applications and Case
studies.

Text Book
1. Sholom Weiss, Nitin Indurkhya, Tong Zhang, Fred Damerau “The Text Mining
Handbook: Advanced Approaches in Analyzing Unstructured Data”, Springer,
paperback 2010.
2. Ronen Feldman, James Sanger - “The Text Mining Handbook: Advanced
Approaches in Analyzing Unstructured Data”-Cambridge University press, 2006.

References
1. Charu C. Aggarwal, Cheng Xiang Zhai, Mining Text Data, Springer; 2012.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 129 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 know about the basics of text mining.
CO2 Identify the different features that can be mined from text and web documents.
CO3 learn about text classification.
CO4 learn to improve the efficiency of features and reduce the dimensionality.
CO5 understand the basics of recent advances in text classification.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 130 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE23

Course Title : INTERNET OF THINGS
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : CSIR11, ECPE12, C/C++ and Python Programming
skills
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand basics of an IOT System, IoT sensors, IoT hardware and
communication protocols, data storage, data analysis and use them for real time
IoT enabled domains.

Course Content
Introduction to IoT and IoT levels : Functional blocks of an IoT system (Sensors, Data
Ingress, Data Aggregation Point Communication point back to the cloud, Analysis, Decision
making, Actuation) Basic of Physical and logical design of IoT (IoT protocols, communication
models) IoT enabled domains (Home automation, Smart cities, environment monitoring,
renewable energy, agriculture, industry, healthcare, marketing and management) M2M,
Difference between IoT, Embedded Systems and M2M, Industry 4.0 concepts.

IoT sensors and hardware : Passive and active sensors, differences, Different kinds of
sensors (Temperature, humidity, pressure, obstacle, water flow, accelerometer, color, gyro,
load cell, finger print, motion, ultrasonic distance, magnetic vibration, eye blink, hear beat,
PPG, glucose, body position, blood pressure), Multi-sensors, Pre-processing (sampling,
filtering, ADC, size of data, local memory, compression), IoT front end hardware (Raspberry
Pi, Arduino, Galileo, beagle bone equivalent platforms)

Introduction to IoT protocols: Infrastructure (6LowPAN, IPv4/IPv6, RPL), Identification (EPC,

uCode, IPv6, URIs), Communication/ Transport (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, ZigBee, LPWAN), Data
Protocols (MQTT, CoAP, AMQP, WebSocket, Node)

IoT Cloud and data analytics: Collecting data from sensors, Data Ingress, Cloud storage, IoT
cloud platforms (Amazon AWS, Microsoft Azure, Google APIs), Data analytics for IoT,
Software and management tool for IoT, Dashboard design

IoT architectures with case studies: Business models for IoT, smart cities, agriculture,
healthcare, industry. Case studies/Mini projects for the real time IoT applications.

Text Book
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”,
Universities Press, 2015.

References
1. Raj kamal, Internet of Things, Architecture and Design Principles, McGraw-Hill, 2017
2. Manoel Carlos Ramon, “Intel® Galileo and Intel® Galileo Gen 2: API Features and
Arduino Projects for Linux Programmers”, Apress, 2014.H. Gerez, “Algorithms for
VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley, 1999.
3. Marco Schwartz, “Internet of Things with the Arduino Yun”, Packt Publishing, 2014.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 131 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 understand basic premise of an IOT System
CO2 be familiar with the sensors available for IoT applications
CO3 learn the front-end hardware platforms and communication protocols for IoT.
CO4 understand cloud storage, data analysis and management
CO5 usage for real time IoT enabled domains

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 132 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE76

Course Title : Computer Vision
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The focus of this course is the understanding of algorithms and techniques used in computer
vision.
CLO2 Provide pointers into the literature and exercise a project based on a literature search and
one or more research papers.
CLO3 Practice software implementation of different concepts and techniques covered in the
course.
CLO4 Utilize programming and scientific tools for relevant software implementation.

Course Content

Introduction: overview of computer vision, related areas, and applications; overview of

software tools; overview of course objectives.; introduction to OpenCV. Image formation and
representation: imaging geometry, radiometry, digitization, cameras and projections, rigid and
affine transformations, Filtering: convolution, smoothing, differencing, and scale space

Feature detection: edge detection, corner detection, line and curve detection, active contours,
SIFT and HOG descriptors, shape context descriptors, Model fitting: Hough transform, line
fitting, ellipse and conic sections fitting, algebraic and Euclidean distance measures.

Camera calibration: camera models; intrinsic and extrinsic parameters; radial lens distortion;
direct parameter calibration; camera parameters from projection matrices; orthographic, weak
perspective, affine, and perspective camera models.

Motion analysis: the motion field of rigid objects; motion parallax; optical flow, the image
brightness constancy equation, affine flow; differential techniques; feature-based techniques;
regularization and robust estimation; motion segmentation through EM, Motion tracking:
statistical filtering; iterated estimation; observability and linear systems; the Kalman filter; the
extended Kalman filter

Object recognition and shape representation: alignment, appearance-based methods,

invariants, image Eigen spaces, data-based techniques.
References

1. Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, R. Szeliski, Springer, 2011.

2. Computer Vision: A Modern Approach, D. Forsyth and J. Ponce, Prentice Hall, 2nd ed.,
2011.
3. Introductory techniques for 3D computer vision, E. Trucco and A. Verri, Prentice Hall,
1998.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 133 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 To understand the fundamental problems of computer vision.

CO2 To learn techniques, mathematical concepts and algorithms used in computer vision to
facilitate further study in this area.
CO3 To get an idea regarding the camera calibration and its importance.
CO4 To study different kinds of motion estimation methodologies and its applications.
CO5 To understand the basic concepts of object and shape recognition techniques

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 134 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE77

Course Title : Natural Language Processing
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Understand NLP tasks in syntax, semantics and pragmatics

CLO2 Implement machine learning techniques used in NLP

Course Content

Introduction – Why NLP? NLP versus speech recognition- Applications-problem of ambiguity-

role of machine learning in NLP- Basic neural networks for NLP

Words – Morphology and Finite State transducers-Tokenization – Computational Phonology

and Pronunciation Modelling

Probabilistic models in NLP—Role of language models- Simple N-gram model – Evaluation:

Perplexity and Word Error Rate. Parts of Speech Tagging- Hidden markov models–Viterbi
algorithm, Maximum Entropy Markov model

Semantic analysis - Lexical semantics and word-sense disambiguation. Compositional

semantics. Semantic Role Labeling and Semantic Parsing

Machine Translation- Statistical translation, word alignment, phrase-based translation, and

synchronous grammars, evaluation.

References

1. Natural Language Processing, by Jacob Eisenstein, MIT Press.

2. Speech and Language Processing by Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin
3. Foundations of Statistical Natural Language processing by Manning C. D. and Schutze H.,
First Edition, MIT Press, 1999
4. Neural Network Methods for Natural Language Processing by Yoav Goldberg, Morgan &
Claypool Publishers.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand NLP and the role of machine learning in NLP

CO2 Describe finite state transducer operations and pronunciation modelling in NLP
CO3 Illustrate various probabilistic models in NLP.
CO4 Study semantic analysis in NLP
CO5 Learn various machine translation approaches and the different evaluation metrics.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 135 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE78

Course Title : Optimization Methods In Machine Learning
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The course aims to equip students with advanced techniques and methods in
optimization that are tailored to large-scale statistics and machine learning
problems

Course Content

Basics of convex optimization-convex sets, convexity-preserving operations, examples of

convex programs (linear programming (LP), second-order cone programming (SOCP),
semidefinite programming (SDP)), convex relaxation, KKT conditions, duality

Gradient-based methods-gradient descent, subgradient, mirror descent, Frank–Wolfe

method, Nesterov’s accelerated gradient method, ODE interpretations, dual methods,
Nesterov’s smoothing, proximal gradient methods, Moreau–Yosida regularization

Operator splitting methods-augmented Lagrangian methods, alternating direction method of

multipliers (ADMM), monotone operators, Douglas–Rachford splitting, primal and dual
decomposition

Stochastic and nonconvex optimization-dualaveraging, Polyak–Juditsky averaging, stochastic

variance reduced gradient (SVRG), Langevin dynamics, escaping saddle points, landscape of
nonconvex problems, deep learning

Applications of optimization methods in Image/Video/Multimedia Processing

References

1. Stephen Boyd and Lieven Vandenberghe’s book: Convex Optimization

2. Nesterov’s old book: Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course
3. Nesterov’s new book: Lectures on Convex Optimization
4. Neal Parikh and Stephen Boyd’s monograph: Proximal Algorithms
5. Sebastien Bubeck’s monograph: Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity
6. Moritz Hardt’s Berkeley EE 227C course note
7. Prateek Jain and Purushottam Kar’s survey on nonconvex optimization
8. Kristin Bennett, Emilio Parrado-Hernandez. Interplay of Optimization and Machine
Learning Research, Journal of Machine Learning Research, 2006.
9. Nati Srebro, Ambuj Tewari. Stochastic Optimization for Machine Learning, Tutorial at
International Conference on Machine Learning, 2010.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 To learn the basic concepts of convex optimization
CO2 To study gradient based optimization techniques
CO3 To understand the problem solving using operator splitting methods
CO4 To learn stochastic and non-convex optimization Techniques,
CO5 To execute applications of optimization techniques in different domains

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 136 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE79

Course Title : Hardware for Deep Learning
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To get an idea about deep learning and how to implement deep learning algorithms
on FPGA

Course Content

Introduction to Deep Learning: From AI to DL, Neural Network: Perceptrons, Back

Propagation, Over-fitting, Regularization. Deep Networks: Definition, Motivation, Applications,
Convolution Neural Network (CNN): Basic architecture, Activation functions, Pooling, Handling
vanishing gradient problem, Dropout, Weight initialization methods, Batch Normalization.
Training Neural networks, Additional CNN Components, Famous CNNs, Applications,
Software libraries.

Computing Convolutions: Mapping Matrix multiplication, Computational Transforms,

Accelerator Architectures, Dataflow Taxonomy

Reducing the Complexity: Light weight models, reducing precision, Aggressive

Quantization, pruning & Deep compression.

The Deep Learning Acceleration Landscape: parallelism in deep learning, Traditional

programmable hardware, specialized deep learning hardware platforms, deep learning
software stack, Specialized research ASICs.

FPGAs for Deep Learning: Overview of hardware architectures for deep learning, Effective
management of FPGA memory resources, optimizing algorithms and data representation for
FPGA arithmetic resources, Integrating hardware and software.

References

1. Ian Goodfellow, Yishuv Bengio and Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning.” MIT Press. 2016.
ISBN: 978-0262035613. Available online for free at: http://www.deeplearningbook.org
2. Vivienne Sze; Yu-Hsin Chen; Tien-Ju Yang; Joel S. Emer, “Efficient Processing of Deep
Neural Networks” Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 1st Edition, 2020.
3. Tushar Krishna, Hyoukjun Kwon, Angshuman Parashar, Michael Pellauer, and Ananda
Samajdar, “Data Orchestration in Deep Learning Accelerators”, Morgan & Claypool
Publishers, 1st Edition, 2020.
4. Piotr Antonik, “Application of FPGA to Real‐Time Machine Learning”, Springer, 2018.
5. Stanford C231n, 2017
6. Sze, et al. https://eyeriss.mit.edu/ ISCA Tutorial 2019
7. Sze, et al. “Efficient Processing of Deep Neural Networks: A Tutorial and Survey”,
Proceedings of the IEEE, 2017
8. Prof. Adam Teman https://www.eng.biu.ac.il/temanad/hardware-for-deep-learning/
9. https://jameswhanlon.com/

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 137 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the context of convolutional neural networks and deep learning algorithms.
CO2 Know how to use convolution in deep learning techniques.
CO3 Understand the necessity and importance of light weight models with low complexity through
specialized hardware architecture
CO4 Know how to optimize hardware performance in deep neural network applications.
CO5 Discuss, suggest and evaluate specialised hardware architectures to implement deep learning
algorithms in FPGA and utilise deep learning concepts in resource constrained reliable systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 138 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE80

Course Title : Image and Video Processing
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The course aims to equip students with basic image and video processing
techniques.

Course Content

Image Formation and Representation: 3D to 2D projection, photometric image formation,

trichromatic colour representation, video format (SD, HD, UHD, HDR), contrast enhancement
(concept of histogram, nonlinear mapping, histogram equalization)
Review of 1D Fourier transform and convolution: Concept of spatial frequency. Continuous
and Discrete Space 2D Fourier transform. 2D convolution and its interpretation in frequency
domain. Implementation of 2D convolution. Separable filters. Frequency response. Linear
filtering (2D convolution) for noise removal, image sharpening, and edge detection. Gaussian
filters, DOG and LOG filters as image.
Geometric mapping and Feature detection: Geometric mapping (affine, homography), Feature
based camera motion estimation (RANSAC). Image warping. Image registration. Panoramic
view stitching, Feature detection (Harris corner, scale space, SIFT), feature descriptors (SIFT).
Bag of Visual Word representation for image classification.
Motion estimation: optical flow equation, optical flow estimation (Lucas-Kanade method, KLT
tracker); block matching, multi-resolution estimation. Deformable registration (medical
applications), Moving object detection (background/foreground separation): Robust PCA (low
rank + sparse decomposition). Global camera motion estimation from optical flows. Video
stabilization. Video scene change detection.
Video Coding: block-based motion compensated prediction and interpolation, adaptive spatial
prediction, block-based hybrid video coding, rate-distortion optimized mode selection, rate
control, Group of pictures (GoP) structure, tradeoff between coding efficiency, delay, and
complexity, depth from disparity, disparity estimation, view synthesis. Multiview video
compression. Depth camera (Kinect). 360 video camera and view stitching.

References

1. Richard Szeliski, Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications. (Available online:”Link“)

(Cover most of the material, except sparsity-based image processing and image and video
coding)
2. (Optional) Y. Wang, J. Ostermann, and Y.Q.Zhang, Video Processing and Communications.
Prentice Hall, 2002. “Link” (Reference for image and video coding, motion estimation, and
stereo)
3. (Optional) R. C. Gonzalez and R. E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall, (3rd
Edition) 2008. ISBN number 9780131687288. “Link” (Good reference for basic image
processing, wavelet transforms and image coding).

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 139 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the concept of image formation and representation

CO2 Know the need of transformation and convolution
CO3 Understand the necessity and importance of feature detection and geometric mapping
CO4 Know how to do motion estimation in video
CO5 To understand the basic ideas of video coding

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 140 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE81

Course Title : Automated Test Engineering for Electronics
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content

Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) – types of PCB – multilayer PCBs – Plated though Hole Technology (PTH) -
Surface Mount Technology (SMT) – Ball Grid Array (BGA) Technology. Bare PCB electrical test concepts, Loaded
PCB Visual inspection, Automated Optical inspection systems, X-Ray inspection systems- Measuring Passive
components – 2 wire, 3 wire, 4 wire and 6 wire measurement concepts, Guarding techniques, Shorts location, Most
common manufacturing defects, Automated Manufacturing defect analyzers, Nodal Impedance / analog signature
analysis. Flying probe testers.
Concepts of PCB Trouble-shooting, Symptom recognition, Bracketing technique, Failure types and fault causes,
Manual Trouble shooting, Use of DMM, Oscilloscope, Signal Generators, Logic Probes, Logic Pulsers, Logic
Analyzers, Automated Test Techniques – CPU Emulation technique, ROM Emulation, In-Circuit Comparators, In-
Circuit Emulators, Functional Testing of Digital ICs, Library models, Concepts of In-circuit Testing, - Back Driving
technique – international defence standards - Auto Compensation, In-Circuit Test of Open collector / Emitter
Devices, Tri-State, Bi-Directional Devices, Concepts of Digital Guarding, Analog and Mixed Signal ICs Test,
advantages and limitations of in-circuit testing, AC – DC Parametric testing, –Advanced test techniques- Boundary
Scan Test , Learn and compare technique – digital signatures, Bus Cycle Signature Test , Analog signatures.
ATE system components, Main Test Vector processor, Digital Subsystem, Pin Electronics, Programmable drive
and threshold levels, RAM behind each pin, Controlling slew rate, Skew between channels, Data formats, Digital
and analog simulation, Test Vector Generation, Fault simulation, Fault coverage, Test Languages, Verilog, VHDL,
Automatic compare, Analog Sub system, Digital and analog matrix switch circuits, digital and analog highways,
Integration of JTAG, Boundary Scan Test, BSDL, External Instrumentation, Functional and Timing tests.
Concepts of Test Program (T.P) Generation. Commercially available off the shelf Test Equipment’s (COTS)
Board Functional Test (BFT) techniques – Go-No-go Test – Diagnostic Test, Reliability Test, Thermal Shock
Test, Full functional Edge to edge test, Cluster Test – Guided Probe Backtracking Technique – Simulators – Online
and Offline Simulation - Fault Simulation– Comprehensiveness of Board program – Fault Dictionary– Analysis –
BS and Non-BS device testing–- Sample board programming and testing – BS interconnect and simulating faults -
External Instrumentation used for board testing – PXI Instrumentation – Integration of PXI instruments for testing
Design for testability (DFT) and Design for manufacturability (DFM) - Basics of ATPG, – Fault Models ––
Design considerations for edge functional test, Design considerations for Bus Cycle Signature Test, Design
considerations for Boundary Scan Test, Built-in Self Test, Modular Design,– ATE for test - DFM - Manufacturing
phases in industry oriented Production process – strategies – new strategy - benefits of new strategies

References

1. Test Engineering for Electronic Hardware – S R Sabapathi, Qmax Test Equipments P

Ltd., 2011
2. Practical Electronic Fault Finding and Trouble shooting - Robin Pain Newnes, Reed
Educational and professional publishing Ltd., 1996
3. The Fundamentals of Digital Semiconductor Testing, Floyd, Pearson Education India,
Sep-2005
4. Building a Successful Board Test Strategy-Stephen F Scheiber-Butterworth
Heinemann

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 141 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE82

Course Title : Foundations of Artificial Intelligence
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Approaches to produce "intelligent" systems, Knowledge representation (both symbolic and
neural network), search and machine learning.
CLO2 To learn the principles and fundamentals of designing AI programs.

Course Content

Introduction to AI-Problem Solving as State Space Search, Uniformed Search, Heuristic

Search, Informed Search, Constraint Satisfaction Problems, Searching AND/OR Graphs.

Knowledge representation and Reasoning-Introduction to Knowledge Representation,

Propositional Logic, First Order Logic –I, First Order Logic –II, Inference in First Order Logic-
I, Inference in First Order Logic – II, Answer Extraction, Procedural Control of Reasoning,
Reasoning under Uncertainty, Bayesian Network, Decision Network.

Planning and decision Making-Introduction to Planning, Plan Space Planning, Planning

Graph and Graph Plan, Practical Planning and Acting, Sequential Decision Problems, Making
Complex Decisions.

Machine Learning-Introduction to Machine Learning, Learning Decision Trees, Linear

Regression, Support Vector Machines, Unsupervised Learning, Reinforcement Learning,
Introduction to deep learning, neural network learning

References

1. Patrick Henry Winston, Artificial Intelligence, Third Edition, Addison-Wesley Publishing

Company, 2004.
2. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 3rd Edition,
PHI 2009.
3. Nils J Nilsson, Principles of Artificial Intelligence, Illustrated Reprint Edition, Springer
Heidelberg, 2014.
4. Nils J. Nilsson, Quest for Artificial Intelligence, First Edition, Cambridge University Press,
2010.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 To learn the concepts of artificial intelligence

CO2 To study problem solving techniques
CO3 To understand the representation of knowledge and reasoning mechanism
CO4 To learn to panning and decision making
CO5 To study network models used for learning

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 142 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE84

Course Title : Microwave Circuits
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students familiarize with ABCD parameters, S parameters,

Applications of planar transmission lines in the practical microwave circuits, Design
and layout of all Microwave Integrated Circuit Design components and then
systems.

Course Content

Introduction and application of microwave circuits - Two-port network characterization. ABCD

parameters, Conversion of S matrix in terms of ABCD matrix. Scattering matrix representation
of microwave components. Review of Smith chart and its application- Impedance matching
using Lumped and Distributed approach.
Microwave Passive circuit design: Characteristics, properties, design parameters and
applications- Design and realization of MIC Power dividers. 3 dB hybrid design. Directional
Coupler design- Hybrid ring design.
Microwave filter design- Filter design by insertion loss method –Richards and Kuroda
transformation. K inverter, J inverter. Resonator filters. Realization using microstrip lines and
strip lines.
Microwave amplifier design- Power gain equations -Stability considerations. Maximum gain
design, Design for specific gain -Low Noise Amplifier Design. High power design.
Microwave oscillator design. One – port and two – port negative resistance oscillators and
oscillator design

References

1. Reinhold Ludwig, RF circuit design, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall 2014, ISBN: 978-
0131471375
2. David. M. Pozar, Microwave engineering, 4th edition, John Wiley, 2011, ISBN: 978-
0470631553.
3. Devendra K. Misra, “Radio-Frequency and microwave communication circuits
analysis and design”, 2nd edition, University of Wisconsin-Mulwaukee, A John Wiley &
Sons Publication
4. B. Bhat, S. K Koul, “Stripline like transmission lines for Microwave Integrated Circuits”,
New Age International Pvt. Ltd Publishers, 2007.
5. I.J.Bahl & P.Bhartia, “Microwave Solid state Circuit Design (2/e)”, Wiley, 2003.
6. Matthew M. Radmanesh, Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics Illustrated,
Prentice Hall, 2012
7. S.Y.Liao, “Microwave Circuit Analysis and Amplifier Design”, Prentice-Hall, 1986.
8. G. Mathaei, L young, E.M.T. Jones, “Microwave filters, Impedance-Matching networks
and Coupling structures”, Artech House Books.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 143 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the basics of Scattering matrix and two port characterization and
importance of matching circuits.
CO2 Analyze the working principles of couplers, power dividers etc. and their design.
CO3 Design the different types of MIC filters and their implementation.
CO4 Understand the complexities of microwave amplifier design and its stability features.
CO5 Analyze and appreciate the design principles of microwave oscillators.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 144 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECOE85

Course Title : Computational Neuroscience
Type of Course : OE
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To provide students a quantitative understanding of information processing by
neurons in the brain.
CLO2 To review the state-of-the-art in applying computational approaches to address
cognitive neuroscience research problems.

Course Content

Introduction to Neurons: Neuron structure, Networks of Neurons and Synapses, System of

neural processing, Basic structures in the brain, Sensory - Executive - Behavior systems,
Excitable Membranes and Neural Activity- Membrane Potential and All or None Spike, Patch
Clamp Techniques, Membrane Potential, Ion Channels, Current Injection – Synapses, Single
neuron activity,

Point models: Hodgkin Huxley Equations (HHE), Point and Compartmental Models of
Neurons, Hodgkin Huxley Equations – I & II, Hodgkin Huxley Equations – II, Reducing the
HHE and Moris-Lecar Equations (MLE) 5) Properties of MLE, Analysis of Neural Models,
Phase Plane Analysis – I & II, Analyzing HHE, Bifurcations, Other Point Models

Spike Trains: Encoding and Decoding – I, II, & III: Random Variables and Random Processes,
Spike Train Statistics and Response Measure, Receptive fields and Models of Receptive
Fields, The Spike Triggered Average (Coding), Stimulus Reconstruction (Decoding),
Nonlinear approaches: Basics of Information Theory, Maximally Informative Dimensions,
Discrimination based approaches, Measuring Spike Train Distances, Statistical Methods in
Discrimination, Examples-I & II: Encoding/Decoding in Neural Systems, Neural Population
Based Encoding/Decoding – I & II, Population Based Encoding/Decoding

Plasticity – I, II, III, & IV: Synaptic Transmission and Synaptic Strength, Ways of Modification
of Synaptic Strength, Types of Plasticity, Short Term Plasticity – I & II, Implications of Short
Term Plasticity, Long Term Plasticity – I & II, Modeling Long Term Plasticity, Computational
Implications, Adaptation, Attention, Learning and Memory – I & II, Developmental Changes,
Modeling Phenomena with Plasticity, Conditioning and Reinforcement Learning, Reward
Prediction (Error), Decision Problems, Learning and Memory – II, Developmental Changes

Theoretical Approaches and Current Research: Optimal Coding Principles – I, Optimal Coding
Principles – II, Theoretical Approaches to Understanding Plasticity, Current Topics – I, Current
Topics - II
References
1. “Theoretical Neuroscience: Computational and Mathematical Modeling of Neural
Systems”, P. Dayan and L. F. Abbott, The MIT Press, London, England, 2005
2. Principles of Neural Science, E. R. Kandel, J. D. Koester, S. H. Mack, and S. A.
Siegelbaum, Mc Graw Hill, USA, 2012.
3. “Nonlinear Dynamics and Chaos”, S. H. Strogatz, CRC Press, New York, 2018
4. “Elements of Information Theory and Coding”, T. M. Cover and J. A. Thomas, Wiley &
Sons, 2005
5. “Methods in Neuronal Modeling”, C. Koch and I. Segev, The MIT Press, 2003

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 145 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 To understand how humans learn efficiently, create, and recall memories, make
decisions among many others.
CO2 To analyze different point models.
CO3 To understand representation of information by neurons and how such information
may be readout for practical applications.
CO4 To analyze computational modeling of implementing plasticity, the most important
aspect of the brain, aiding in learning, memory and cognition.
CO5 To verify the optimal coding principles in various real-time applications.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 146 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

MINORS (MI)

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 147 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI10

Course Title : SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : NA
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students to understand the fundamental characteristics of signals and systems
in terms of both the time and transform domains

CLO2 Development of the mathematical skills to solve problems involving convolution, filtering,
modulation and sampling.

Course Content

Definition of Signals and Systems, Classification of Signals, Operations on signals, Singularity

functions and related functions. Analogy between vectors and signals - orthogonal signal space,
complete set of orthogonal functions, Parseval’s relations. Fourier series representation of continuous
time periodic signals -Trigonometric and Exponential Fourier series- Properties of Fourier series.
Fourier transform of aperiodic signals, standard signals and periodic signals - Properties of Fourier
transforms. Hilbert transform and its properties. Laplace transforms-RoC-properties. Inverse Laplace
transform.
Continuous-time Systems and its properties. Linear time invariant (LTI) system-Impulse response.
Convolution. Analysis of LTI System using Laplace and Fourier transforms.
Sampling and reconstruction of band limited signals. Low pass and band pass sampling theorems.
Aliasing. Anti-aliasing filter. Practical Sampling-aperture effect.
Discrete-time signals and systems. Discrete Fourier series. Z-transform and its properties. Analysis of
LSI systems using Z – transform.

Text Books
1. A.V.Oppenheim, A. Willsky, S. Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems (2/e)”, Pearson 200.
2. S.Haykin and B.VanVeen “Signals and Systems, Wiley, 1998.

References

1. M.Mandal and A.Asif, “Continuous and Discrete Time Signals and Systems, Cambridge, 2007.
2. D.C.Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications (2/e)”, Pearson, 200.
3. S.S.Soliman & M.D.Srinath, “Continuous and Discrete Signals and Systems”, Prentice- Hall,
1990.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 148 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the mathematical description and representation of continuous-time and

discrete-time signals.
CO2 Analyze the spectral characteristics of continuous-time periodic and aperiodic signals using
Fourier analysis.
CO3 Analyse system properties based on impulse response and Fourier analysis
CO4 Convert a continuous time signal into discrete time signal and reconstruct the continuous
time signals back from its samples
CO5 Apply the Laplace transform and Z- transform respectively for the analyse of continuous-
time and discrete-time signals.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 149 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI11

Course Title : NETWORK ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : NA
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students capable of analysing any given electrical network.

CLO2 To make the students to learn synthesis of an electrical network for a given impedance/
admittance function.

Course Content

Network concept. Elements and sources. Kirchhoff’s laws. Tellegen’s theorem. Network equilibrium
equations. Node and Mesh method. Source superposition. Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems. Network
graphs.

First and second order networks. State equations. Transient response. Network functions.
Determination of the natural frequencies and mode vectors from network functions.

Sinusoidal steady-state analysis. Maximum power-transfer theorem. Resonance. Equivalent and dual
networks. Design of equalizers.

Two-port network parameters. Interconnection of two port networks. Barlett’s bisection theorem. Image
and
Iterative parameters. Design of attenuators.

Two-terminal network synthesis. Properties of Hurwitz polynomial and Positive real function.
Synthesis of LC, RC and RL Networks, Foster Forms and Cauer Forms.

Text Books
1. Hayt W. H., Kemmerly J. E. and Durbin S. M., “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, 6th Ed., Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2008.
2. F.F. Kuo, “Network analysis and Synthesis”, Wiley International Edition, 2008.

References

1. Valkenberg V., “Network Analysis”, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall International Edition, 2007.
2. B.S.Nair and S.R.Deepa, “Network analysis and Synthesis”, Elsevier, 2012.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 150 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 analyze the electric circuit using network theorems

CO2 understand and Obtain Transient & Forced response

CO3 determine Sinusoidal steady state response; understand the real time applications of
maximum power transfer theorem and equalizer

CO4 understand the two–port network parameters, are able to find out two-port network
parameters & overall response for interconnection of two-port networks.

CO5 synthesize one port network using Foster form, Cauer form.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 151 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI12

Course Title : ELECTRODYNAMICS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC
WAVES
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : NA
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the rudiments of Electromagnetic theory and wave propagation
essential for subsequent courses on microwave engineering, antennas and wireless
communication

Course Content
Electrostatics. Coulomb’s law. Gauss’s law and applications. Electric potential. Poisson’s and Laplace
equations. Method of images. Multipole Expansion.

Electrostatic fields in matter. Dielectrics and electric polarization. Capacitors with dielectric substrates.
Linear dielectrics. Force and energy in dielectric systems.

Magneto statics. Magnetic fields of steady currents. Biot-Savart’s and Ampere’s laws. Magnetic vector
potential. Magnetic properties of matter.

Electrodynamics. Flux rule for motional emf. Faraday’s law. Self and mutual inductances. Maxwell’s
Equations. Electromagnetic Boundary conditions. Poynting theorem.

Electromagnetic wave propagation. Uniform plane waves. Wave polarization. Waves in matter.
Reflection and transmission at boundaries. Propagation in an ionized medium.

Text Books
1. D.J.Griffiths, “Introduction to Electrodynamics (3/e)”, PHI, 2001
2. E.C. Jordan & G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”, PHI, 1995.

References

1. W.H.Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics, (7/e)”, McGraw Hill, 2006.

2. D.K.Cheng, “Field and Wave Electromagnetics, (2/e)”, Addison Wesley, 1999.

3. M.N.O.Sadiku, ”Principles of Electromagnetics, (4/e)”, Oxford University Press, 2011.

4. N.Narayana Rao, “Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, (6/e)”, Pearson, 2006.

5. R.E.Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering (2/e)”, McGraw –Hill, 2002.

6. R.E.Collin, “Antennas and Radiowave Propagation”, McGraw-Hill, 1985.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 152 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 recognize and classify the basic Electrostatic theorems and laws and to derive them.
CO2 discuss the behaviour of Electric fields in matter and Polarization concepts.

CO3 classify the basic Magneto static theorems and laws and infer the magnetic properties of
matter.

CO4 summarize the concepts of electrodynamics &to derive and discuss the Maxwell’s equations.

CO5 students are expected to be familiar with Electromagnetic wave propagation and wave
polarization.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 153 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI13

Course Title : SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND DEVICES
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : NA
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students understand the fundamentals of electronic devices.

CLO2 To train them to apply these devices in mostly used and important applications.

Course Content

Semiconductor materials: crystal growth, film formation, lithography, etching and doping. Formation
of energy bands in solids, Concept of hole, Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, conductivity,
Equilibrium Carrier concentration, Density of states and Fermi level, Carrier transport – Drift and
Diffusion, continuity equation, Hall effect and its applications.

P-N junction diodes, Energy band diagram, biasing, V-I characteristics, capacitances. Diode models,
Break down Mechanisms, Rectifiers, Limiting and Clamping Circuits, types of diodes.

BJT Physics and Characteristics modes of operation, Ebers-Moll Model, BJT as a switch and Amplifier,
breakdown mechanisms, Photo devices.

MOSFET: Ideal I-V characteristics, non-ideal I-V effects, MOS Capacitor, MOSFET as switch, CMOS
Logic gate Circuits, Bi-CMOS circuits, CCDs.

State-of-the-art MOS technology: small-geometry effects, FinFETs, Ultrathin body FETs. Display
devices, Operation of LCDs, Plasma, LED and HDTV

Text Books
1. S.M.Sze, Semiconductors Devices, Physics and Technology, (2/e), Wiley, 2002
2. A.S.Sedra & K.C.Smith, Microelectronic Circuits (5/e), Oxford, 2004

References

1. L.Macdonald & A.C.Lowe, Display Systems, Wiley, 2003Robert Pierret, “Semiconductor

Device Fundamentals,” Pearson Education, 2006

2. J.Millman and C.C.Halkias: Electronic devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill, 1976.

3. B.G.Streetman: Solid state devices, (4/e), PHI, 1995.

4. N.H.E.Weste, D. Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design (3/e)”, Pearson, 2005.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 154 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Apply the knowledge of basic semiconductor material physics and understand fabrication
processes.

CO2 Analyze the characteristics of various electronic devices like diode, transistor etc.,

CO3 Classify and analyze the various circuit configurations of Transistor and MOSFETs.

CO4 Illustrate the qualitative knowledge of Power electronic Devices.

CO5 Become Aware of the latest technological changes in Display Devices.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 155 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI14

Course Title : DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : NA
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To enable students to understand Boolean Algebra, Simplification of Boolean expressions

and Logic Gates designs
CLO2 To enable students to design Combinational and Sequential logic circuits and their system
level realizations.
CLO3 To understand the importance of Finite State Machines and design of digital systems using
FSM
CLO4 To enable students to write and simulate digital circuits and systems using Hardware
Descriptive Language

Course Content

Review of number systems-representation-conversions, error detection and error correction. Review of

Boolean algebra- theorems, sum of product and product of sum simplification, canonical forms-
minterm and maxterm, Simplification of Boolean expressions-Karnaugh map, completely and
incompletely specified functions, Implementation of Boolean expressions using universal gates.
Combinational logic circuits- adders, subtractors, BCD adder, ripple carry look ahead adders, parity
generator, decoders, encoders, multiplexers, DE multiplexers, Realization of Boolean expressions-
using decoders-using multiplexers. Memories – ROM- organization, expansion. PROMs. Types of
RAMs – Basic structure, organization, Static and dynamic RAMs, PLDs, PLAs.
Sequential circuits – latches, flip flops, edge triggering, asynchronous inputs. Shift registers, Universal
shift register, applications. Binary counters – Synchronous and asynchronous up/down counters, mod-
N counter, Counters for random sequence.
Synchronous circuit analysis and design: structure and operation, analysis-transition equations, state
tables and state diagrams, Modelling- Moore machine and Mealy machine- serial binary adder,
sequence recogniser, state table reduction, state assignment. Hazard; Overview and comparison of logic
families.
Introduction to Verilog HDL, Structural, Dataflow and behavioural modelling of combinational and
sequential logic circuits.
Text Books
1. Wakerly J F, “Digital Design: Principles and Practices, Prentice-Hall”, 2nd Ed., 2002.
2. D. D. Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

References

1. S.Brown and Z.Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design”, Tata Mc-
Graw Hill, 2008.
2. D.P. Leach, A. P. Malvino, GoutamGuha, “Digital Principles and Applications”, Tata Mc-
Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
3. M. M. Mano, “Digital Design”, 3rd ed., Pearson Education, Delhi, 2003.
4. R.J.Tocci and N.S.Widner, “Digital Systems - Principles& Applications”, PHI, 10th Ed., 2007.
5. Roth C.H., “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishers. V Ed., 2009.
6. T. L. Floyd and Jain,”Digital Fundamentals”, 8th ed., Pearson Education, 2003.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 156 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Apply the knowledge of Boolean Algebra and simplification of Boolean expressions to
deduce optimal digital networks.
CO2 Study and examine the SSI, MSI and Programmable combinational networks.
CO3 Study and investigate the sequential networks suing counters and shift registers; summarize
the performance of logic families with respect to their speed, power consumption, number
of ICs and cost.
CO4 Work out SSI and MSI digital networks given a state diagram based on Mealy and Moore
configurations.
CO5 Code combinational and sequential networks using Verilog HDL.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 157 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI15

Course Title : DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : NA
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To study about discrete-time Fourier transform (DTFT), the concepts of frequency response
characteristics of a discrete-time systems, DFT and its fast computation.
CLO2 To make the students able to design digital filters (FIR and IIR) and implement in various
forms.
CLO3 To study and understand the concept of multirate DSP systems and its applications

Course Content
Review of LSI system, DTFT, Frequency response of discrete time systems, all pass inverse, linear
phase and minimum phase systems.

DFT, Relationship of DFT to other transforms, FFT, DIT and DIF, FFT algorithm, Linear filtering using
DFT and FFT.

Characteristics of FIR Digital Filters, types and frequency response - Design of FIR digital filters using
window techniques and frequency sampling technique - basic structures and lattice structure for FIR
systems.

Analog filter approximations – Butter worth and Chebyshev, Design of IIR Digital filters from analog
filters, Analog and Digital frequency transformations - Basic structures of IIR systems, Transposed
forms.

Sampling rate conversion by an integer and rational factor, Poly phase FIR structures for sampling rate
conversion.

Text Books
1. J.G.Proakis, D.G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing”, (4/e) Pearson, 2007.
2. A.V.Oppenheim & R.W.Schafer, “Discrete Time Signal processing", (2/e), Pearson Education,
2003.

References

1. S.K.Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing (3/e)”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

2. P.S.R.Diniz, E.A.B.da Silva and S.L.Netto, “Digital Signal Processing”, Cambridge, 2002.
3. E.C.Ifeachor & B.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, (2/e), Pearson Education, 2002.
4. J.R.Jhonson, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice-Hall, 1989.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 158 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 analyze discrete-time systems in both time & transform domain and also through pole-zero
placement.

CO2 analyze discrete-time signals and systems using DFT and FFT.

CO3 design and implement digital finite impulse response (FIR) filters.

CO4 design and implement digital infinite impulse response (IIR) filters.

CO5 understand and develop multirate digital signal processing systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 159 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI16

Course Title : TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI12
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose students to the complete fundamentals and essential feature of waveguides,
resonators and microwave components and also able to give an introduction to microwave
integrated circuit design.

Course Content

Classification of guided wave solutions-TE, TM and TEM waves. Field analysis transmission lines.

Rectangular and circular waveguides. Excitation of waveguides. Rectangular and circular cavity
resonators.

Transmission line equations. Voltage and current waves. Solutions for different terminations.
Transmission-line loading.

Impedance transformation and matching. Smith Chart, Quarter-wave and half-wave transformers.
Binomial and T-chebeyshev transformers. Single, double and triple stub matching.

Microstriplines, stripline, slot lines, coplanar waveguide and fin line. Micro strip MIC design aspects.
Computer- aided analysis and synthesis.

Text Books
1. D.M.Pozar, “Microwave Engineering (3/e)” Wiley, 2004.
2. J.D.Ryder, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, PHI, 2003.

References

1. R.E.Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering (2/e)”, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

2. S.Y.Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, (3/e) PHI, 2005.
3. J. A. Seeger, “Microwave Theory, Components, and Devices” Prentice-Hall-A division of
Simon & Schuster Inc Englewood Cliffs, New Jersy 07632, 1986.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 classify the Guided Wave solutions -TE, TM, and TEM.
CO2 analyze and design rectangular waveguides and understand the propagation of
electromagnetic waves.
CO3 evaluate the resonance frequency of cavity Resonators and the associated modal field.
CO4 analyze the transmission lines and their parameters using the Smith Chart.
CO5 apply the knowledge to understand various planar transmission lines.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 160 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI17

Course Title : ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI13
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students understand the fundamentals of electronic circuits.

Course Content

Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET. Low frequency and high models of
BJT and MOSFET, Small signal Analysis of CE, CS, CD and Cascade amplifier

MOSFET amplifiers: Current mirrors: Basic current mirror, Cascade current mirror, Single-ended
amplifiers: CS amplifier – with resistive load, diode connected load, current source load, triode load,
source degeneration. CG and CD amplifiers, Cascade amplifier,

Frequency response of amplifiers, Differential Amplifiers, CMRR, Differential amplifiers with active
load, two stage amplifiers

Feedback concept, Properties, Feedback amplifiers, Stability analysis, Condition for oscillation,
Sinusoidal oscillators.

Power amplifiers- class A, class B, class AB, Biasing circuits, class C and class D

Text Books
1. A.S.Sedra & K.C.Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits (5/e)”, Oxford, 2004.
2. D.L.Schilling & C.Belove, ”Electronic Circuits: Discrete and Integrated”, (3/e), McGraw Hill,
1989.

References

1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, (2/e), McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. Millman&A., “Microelectronics”, McGraw Hill, 1987.
3. K.V.Ramanan, “Functional Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 illustrate about rectifiers, transistor and FET amplifiers and its biasing. Also compare the
performances of its low frequency models.
CO2 discuss about the frequency response of MOSFET and BJT amplifiers.
CO3 illustrate about MOS and BJT differential amplifiers and its characteristics.
CO4 discuss about the feedback concepts and construct feedback amplifiers and oscillators. Also
summarizes its performance parameters.
CO5 explain about power amplifiers and its types and also analyze its characteristics

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 161 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI18

Course Title : MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI14
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 This subject deals about the basics of 16-bit Microprocessor, 8-bit and 16-bit Micro
controllers, their architectures, internal organization and their functions,
peripherals, and interfacing.

Course Content
Microprocessor based personal computer system. Software model of 8086. Segmented
memory operation. Instruction set. Addressing modes. Assembly language programming.
Interrupts. Programming with DOS and BIOS function calls.

Hardware detail of 8086. . Bus timing. Minimum Vs Maximum mode of operation. Memory
interface. Parallel and serial data transfer methods. 8255 PPI chip. 8259 Interrupt controller.
8237 DMA controller.

Microcontroller. Von-Neumann Vs Harvard architecture. Programming model. Instruction

set of 8051 Microcontroller. Addressing modes. Programming. Timer operation.

Mixed Signal Microcontroller: MSP430 series. Block diagram. Address space. On-chip
peripherals -analog and digital. Register sets. Addressing Modes. Instruction set.
Programming. FRAM Vs flash for low power and reliability.

Peripheral Interfacing using 8051 and Mixed signal microcontroller. Serial data transfer -
UART, SPI and I2C. Interrupts. I/O ports and port expansion. DAC, ADC, PWM, DC motor,
Stepper motor and LCD interfacing.

Text Books
1. J.L.Antonakos, “An Introduction to the Intel Family of Microprocessors”, Pearson, 1999.
2. M.A.Mazidi & J.C.Mazidi “Microcontroller and Embedded systems using Assembly & C. (2/e)”,
Pearson Education, 2007.

References
1. John H. Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, Elsevier Ltd., 2008
2. B.B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors, (7/e), Eastern Economy Edition”, 2006.
3. K.J. Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller “, (3/e), Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004.
4. I. S. MacKenzie and R.C.W.Phan., “The 8051 Microcontroller. (4/e)”, Pearson education, 2008.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 recall and apply the basic concept of digital fundamentals to Microprocessor based personal
computer system.
CO2 identify the detailed s/w & h/w structure of the Microprocessor.
CO3 illustrate how the different peripherals are interfaced with Microprocessor.
CO4 distinguish and analyze the properties of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers.
CO5 analyze the data transfer information through serial & parallel ports.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 162 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI19

Course Title : DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To give an exposure to the various fixed point and floating point DSP architectures, to
understand the techniques to interface sensors and I/O circuits and to implement
applications using these processors.

Course Content

Fixed-point DSP architectures. Basic Signal processing system. Need for DSPs. Difference
between DSP and other processor architectures. TMS320C54X, ADSP21XX, DSP56XX
architecture details. Addressing modes. Control and repeat operations. Interrupts. Pipeline
operation. Memory Map and Buses.

Floating-point DSP architectures. TMS320C3X, DSP96XX architectures. Cache architecture.

Floating-point Data formats. On-chip peripherals. Memory Map and Buses.

On-chip peripherals. Hardware details and its programming. Clock generator with PLL. Serial
port. McBSP. Parallel port. DMA. EMIF. I2C. Real-time-clock (RTC). Watchdog timer.

Interfacing. Serial interface- Audio codec. Sensors - Humidity/temperature sensor, flow sensor,
accelerometer, pulse sensor and finger print scanner. A/D and D/A interfaces. Parallel interface-
Memory interface. RF transceiver interface – Wi-Fi and Zigbee modules.

DSP tools and applications. Implementation of Filters, DFT, QPSK Modem, Speech processing. Video
processing, Video Encoding /Decoding. Biometrics. Machine Vision. High performance computing
(HPC).

Text Books
1. B.Venkataramani & M.Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processor, Architecture, Programming and
Applications”,(2/e), McGraw- Hill,2010
2. S.Srinivasan & Avtar Singh, “Digital Signal Processing, Implementations using DSP
Microprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54X”, Brooks/Cole, 2004.

References

1. S.M.Kuo & W.S.S.Gan,” Digital Signal Processors: Architectures, Implementations, and

Applications”, Printice Hall, 2004

2. C.Marven & G.Ewers, “A Simple approach to digital signal processing”, Wiley Inter science,
1996.

3. R.A.Haddad & T.W.Parson, “Digital Signal Processing: Theory, Applications and Hardware”,
Computer Science Press NY, 1991.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 163 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 learn the architecture details of fixed point DSPs.

CO2 learn the architecture details of floating point DSPs

CO3 infer about the control instructions, interrupts, pipeline operations, memory and
buses.

CO4 illustrate the features of on-chip peripheral devices and its interfacing with real
time application devices.

CO5 learn to implement the signal processing algorithms and applications in DSPs

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 164 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI20

Course Title : ANALOG COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI10
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To develop a fundamental understanding on Communication Systems with emphasis on

analog modulation techniques and noise performance.

Course Content

Basic blocks of Communication System. Amplitude (Linear) Modulation – AM, DSB-SC, SSB-SC and
VSB-SC. Methods of generation and detection. FDM. Super Heterodyne Receivers.

Angle (Non-Linear) Modulation - Frequency and Phase modulation. Transmission Bandwidth of FM

signals, Methods of generation and detection. FM Stereo Multiplexing.

Noise - Internal and External Noise, Noise Calculation, Noise Figure. Noise in linear and nonlinear AM
receivers, Threshold effect.

Noise in FM receivers, Threshold effect, Capture effect, FM Threshold reduction, Pre-emphasis and
De-emphasis.

Pulse Modulation techniques – Sampling Process, PAM, PWM and PPM concepts, Methods of
generation and detection. TDM. Noise performance.

Text Books
1. S.Haykins, Communication Systems, Wiley, (4/e), Reprint 2009.
2. Kennedy, Davis, Electronic Communication Systems (4/e), McGraw Hill, Reprint 2008.

References

1. B.Carlson, Introduction to Communication Systems, McGraw-Hill, (4/e), 2009.

2. J.Smith, Modern Communication Circuits (2/e), McGraw Hill, 1997.

3. J.S.Beasley&G.M.Miler, Modern Electronic Communication (9/e), Prentice-Hall, 2008.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 165 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the basics of communication system and analog modulation techniques

CO2 Apply the basic knowledge of signals and systems and understand the concept of Frequency
modulation.

CO3 Apply the basic knowledge of electronic circuits and understand the effect of Noise in
communication system and noise performance of AM system

CO4 Understand the effect of noise performance of FM system.

CO5 Understand TDM and Pulse Modulation techniques.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 166 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI21

Course Title : ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI12
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of antenna theory and to analyze and design a start of art
antenna for wireless communications.

Course Content

Radiation fundamentals. Potential theory. Helmholtz integrals. Radiation from a current element. Basic
antenna parameters. Radiation field of an arbitrary current distribution. Small loop antennas.

Receiving antenna. Reciprocity relations. Receiving cross section, and its relation to gain. Reception of
completely polarized waves. Linear antennas. Current distribution. Radiation field of a thin dipole.
Folded dipole. Feeding methods. Baluns.

Antenna arrays. Array factorization. Array parameters. Broad side and end fire arrays. Yagi-Uda arrays
Log-periodic arrays.

Aperture antennas. Fields as sources of radiation. Horn antennas. Babinet’s principle. Parabolic
reflector antenna. Microstrip antennas.

Wave Propagation: Propagation in free space. Propagation around the earth, surface wave propagation,
structure of the ionosphere, propagation of plane waves in ionized medium, Determination of critical
frequency, MUF. Fading, tropospheric propagation, Super refraction.

Text Books
1. R.E.Collin, “Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation”, McGraw – Hill, 1985.
2. W.L.Stutzman & G.A.Thiele, “Antenna Theory and Design”, Wiley.

References

1. K.F.Lee, “Principles of Antenna Theory”, Wiley, 1984.

2. F.E. Terman, “Electronic Radio Engineering (4/e)”, McGraw Hill.

3. J.R. James, P. S. Hall, and C. Wood, “Microstrip Antenna Theory and Design”, IEE, 1981.

4. C.A.Balanis, “Modern Antenna Handbook”, Wiley India Pvt. Limited, 2008.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 167 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 select the appropriate portion of electromagnetic theory and its application to antennas.

CO2 distinguish the receiving antennas from transmitting antennas, analyze and justify their
characteristics.

CO3 assess the need for antenna arrays and mathematically analyze the types of antenna arrays.

CO4 distinguish primary from secondary antennas and analyze their characteristics by applying
optics and acoustics principles.

CO5 outline the factors involved in the propagation of radio waves using practical antennas.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 168 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI22

Course Title : ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI17
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce the theoretical & circuit aspects of an Op-amp.

Course Content

Operational Amplifiers, DC and AC characteristics, typical op-amp parameters: Finite gain, finite
bandwidth, Offset voltages and currents, Common-mode rejection ratio, Power supply rejection ratio,
Slew rate, Applications of Op-amp: Precision rectifiers. Summing amplifier, Integrators and
differentiators, Log and antilog amplifiers. Instrumentation amplifiers, voltage to current converters.

Active filters: Second order filter transfer function (low pass, high pass, band pass and band reject),
Butterworth, Chebyshev and Bessel filters. Switched capacitor filter. Notch filter, all pass filters, self-
tuned filters
Opamp as a comparator, Schmitt trigger, Astable and monostable multivibrators, Triangular wave
generator, Multivibrators using 555 timer, Data converters: A/D and D/A converters

PLL- basic block diagram and operation, four quadrant multipliers. Phase detector, VCO, Applications
of PLL:Frequency synthesizers, AM detection, FM detection and FSK demodulation.
CMOS differential amplifiers: DC analysis and small signal analysis of differential amplifier with
Restive load, current mirror load and current source load, Input common-mode range and Common-
mode feedback circuits. OTAs vsOpamps. Slew rate, CMRR, PSRR. Two stage amplifiers,
Compensation in amplifiers (Dominant pole compensation).

Text Books
1. S.Franco, Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated
2. Circuits (3/e) TMH, 2003.
3. Sedra and Smith, Microelectronics Circuits, Oxford Univ. Press, 2004

References

1. Coughlin, Driscoll, OP-AMPS and Linear Integrated Circuits, Prentice Hall, 2001.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 infer the DC and AC characteristics of operational amplifiers and its effect on output and
their compensation techniques.
CO2 elucidate and design the linear and nonlinear applications of an op-amp and special
application ICs.
CO3 explain and compare the working of multi vibrators using special application IC 555 and
general purpose op-amp.
CO4 classify and comprehend the working principle of data converters.
CO5 illustrate the function of application specific ICs such as Voltage regulators, PLL and its
application in communication

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 169 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI23

Course Title : DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI20
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To understand the key modules of digital communication systems with emphasis on digital
modulation techniques.
CLO2 To get introduced to the basics of source and channel coding/decoding and Spread Spectrum
Modulation.

Course Content

Base band transmission. Sampling theorem, Pulse code modulation (PCM), DM, Destination SNR in
PCM systems with noise. Matched filter. Nyquist criterion for zero ISI. Optimum transmit and receive
filters. Correlative Coding, M-ary PAM. Equalization- zero-forcing and basics of adaptive linear
equalizers.

BASK, BFSK, and BPSK- Transmitter, Receiver, Signal space diagram, Error probabilities.
M-ary PSK, M-ary FSK, QAM, MSK and GMSK- Optimum detector, Signal constellation, error
probability.
Linear block codes-Encoding and decoding. Cyclic codes – Encoder, Syndrome Calculator.
Convolutional codes – encoding, Viterbi decoding. TCM.
Spread Spectrum (SS) Techniques- Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum modulation, Frequency-hop
Spread Spectrum modulation - Processing gain and jamming margin.

Text Books
1. S.Haykin, “Communication Systems”, Wiley, (4/e), 2001.
2. J.G.Proakis, “Digital Communication”, Tata McGraw – Hill, (4/e), 2001.

References

1. B.Sklar, “Digital Communications: Fundamentals & Applications”, Pearson Education, (2/e),

2001.
2. A.B.Carlson, “ Communication Systems”, McGraw Hill, 3/e,2002
3. R.E.Zimer & R.L.Peterson,” Introduction to Digital Communication”, PHI,3/e, 2001

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Apply the knowledge of signals and system and explain the conventional digital
communication system.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of statistical theory of communication and evaluate the performance
of digital communication system in the presence of noise.
CO3 Describe and analyze the performance of advance modulation techniques.
CO4 Apply the knowledge of digital electronics and describe the error control codes like block
code, cyclic code.
CO5 Describe and analyze the digital communication system with spread spectrum modulation.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 170 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI24

Course Title : MICROWAVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI16
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The subject introduces the essential Microwave Circuit Theory and the design aspects of
Microwave Integrated Circuit components.

Course Content

Scattering matrix formulation. Passive microwave devices; terminations, bends, corners, attenuators,
phase changers, directional couplers and hybrid junctions. Basics and design considerations of
Microstripline, strip line, coplanar waveguide, Slot line and Finline.

Microwave measurements; frequency, wavelength, VSWR. Impedance determination. S-parameter

measurements. Network analyzer.

Microwave network parameters. Basic circuit elements for microwaves. Transmission line sections and
stubs. Richard transformation. Kuroda identities.

MIC filter design. Low pass to high pass, band pass and band stop transformations. Realization using
microstrip lines and strip lines.

Design and realization of MIC components.3 dB hybrid design. Ratrace Hybrid Ring, Backward wave
directional coupler, power divider; realization using microstrip lines and strip lines.

Text Books
1. I.J.Bahl & P.Bhartia, “Microwave Solid state Circuit Design”, Wiley, 2003.
2. D.M.Pozar, “Microwave Engineering (2/e)”, Wiley, 2004.

References

1. A. Das, “Microwave Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000

2. B.Bhat, S. K. Koul, ”Stripline like transmission lines for Microwave Integrated Circuits”, New
age International Pvt. Ltd. Publishers 2007.
3. G. Matthaei, E.M.T. Jones , L. Young , George Matthaei, Leo Young , George L. Matthaei
“Microwave filters, Impedance Matching Network, Coupling Structures
(Updated)”,Hardcover, 1,096 Pages, Published 1980 by Artech House Publishers ISBN-13:
978-0-89006-099-5, ISBN: 0-89006-099-1

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Learn the basics of S parameters and use them in describing the components
CO2 Expose to the Microwave Measurements Principle
CO3 Realize the importance of the theory of Microwave circuit theory.
CO4 Work out the complete design aspects of various M.I.C. Filters
CO5 Confidently design all M.I.C. components to meet the industry standard

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 171 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI25

Course Title : VLSI SYSTEMS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI14
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce various aspects of VLSI circuits and their design including testing.

Course Content

VLSI design methodology, VLSI technology- NMOS, CMOS and BICMOS circuit fabrication. Layout
design rules. Stick diagram. Latch up.

Characteristics of MOS and CMOS switches. Implementation of logic circuits using MOS and CMOS
technology, multiplexers and memory, MOS transistors, threshold voltage, MOS device design equations.
MOS models, small-signal AC analysis. CMOS inverters, propagation delay of inverters, Pseudo NMOS,
Dynamic CMOS logic circuits, power dissipation.

Programmable logic devices- anti-fuse, EPROM and SRAM techniques. Programmable logic cells.
Programmable inversion and expander logic. Computation of interconnect delay, Techniques for driving
large off-chip capacitors, long lines, Computation of interconnect delays in FPGAs Implementation of
PLD, EPROM, EEPROM, static and dynamic RAM in CMOS.

An overview of the features of advanced FPGAs, IP cores, Softcore processors, Various factors
determining the cost of a VLSI, Comparison of ASICs, FPGAs , PDSPs and CBICs . Fault tolerant VLSI
architectures

VLSI testing -need for testing, manufacturing test principles, design strategies for test, chip level and
system level test techniques.

Text Books
1. N. H. E. Weste, D.F. Harris, “CMOS VLSI design”, (3/e), Pearson , 2005.
2. J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson”, 1997.
References
1. M.M.Vai, “VLSI design”, CRC Press, 2001.
2. Pucknell & Eshraghian, “Basic VLSI Design”, PHI, (3/e), 2003.
3. Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems”, Wiley, 2002.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Describe the techniques used for VLSI fabrication, design of CMOS logic circuits, switches
and memory
CO2 Describe the techniques used the design of CMOS logic circuits, switches and memory in
VLSI
CO3 Generalize the design techniques and analyze the characteristics of VLSI circuits such as area,
speed and power dissipation
CO4 Explain and compare the architectures for FPGA, PAL and PLDs and evaluate their
characteristics such as area, power dissipation and reliability
CO5 Describe the techniques for fault tolerant VLSI circuits
CO6 Use the advanced FPGAs to realize Digital signal processing systems

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 172 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI26

Course Title : WIRELESS COMMUNICAITON
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI23
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To get an understanding of mobile radio communication principles, types and to study the
recent trends adopted in cellular and wireless systems and standards.

Course Content

Introduction to Wireless Communication. Cellular concept. System design fundamentals. Coverage and
Capacity improvement in Cellular system. Technical Challenges.

Mobile Radio Propagation; Reflection, Diffraction, Fading. Multipath propagation. Statistical

characterization of multipath fading. Diversity Techniques.

Path loss prediction over hilly terrain. Practical link budget design using Path loss models. Design
parameters at base station. Antenna location, spacing, heights and configurations.

Multiple access techniques; FDMA, TDMA and CDMA. Spread spectrum. Power control. WCDMA.
CDMA network design. OFDM and MC-CDMA.

GSM.3G, 4G (LTE), NFC systems, WLAN technology. WLL. Hyper LAN. Ad hoc networks.
Bluetooth.

Text Books:
1. T.S.Rappaport, Wireless Communication Principles (2/e), Pearson, 2002.
2. A.F.Molisch, Wireless Communications, Wiley, 2005.

References

1. P.MuthuChidambaraNathan, Wireless Communications, PHI, 2008.

2. W.C.Y.Lee, Mobile Communication Engineering. (2/e), McGraw- Hill, 1998.
3. A.Goldsmith, Wireless Communications, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. S.G.Glisic, Adaptive CDMA, Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Apply the knowledge of basic communication systems and its principles.

CO2 Describe the cellular concept and analyze capacity improvement Techniques.

CO3 Mathematically analyze mobile radio propagation mechanisms.

CO4 Summarize diversity reception techniques.

CO5 Design Base Station (BS) parameters and analyze the antenna configurations.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 173 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI27

Course Title : FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI12 & ECMI20
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the basics of signal propagation through optical fibers, fiber
impairments, components and devices and system design.

Course Content

Optical Fibers: Structure, Wave guiding. Step-index and graded index optical fibers. Modal analysis.
Classification of modes. Single Mode Fibers.

Pulse dispersion. Material and waveguide dispersion. Polarization Mode Dispersion. Absorption,
scattering and bending losses. Dispersion Shifted Fibers, Dispersion Compensating Fibers.

Optical Power Launching and Coupling. Lensing schemes for coupling improvement. Fiber-to-fiber
joints. Splicing techniques. Optical fiber connectors.

Optical sources and detectors. Laser fundamentals. Semiconductor Laser basics. LEDs. PIN and
Avalanche photodiodes, Optical TX/RX Circuits.

Design considerations of fiber optic systems: Analog and digital modulation. Noise in detection process.
Bit error rate. Optical receiver operation. Power Budget and Rise time Budget. WDM.

Text Books
1. G.Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications (5/e)”, McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. G.P.Agarwal, “Fiber Optic Communication Systems”, (3/e), Wiley, 2002.

References

1. M.M.K.Liu, “Principles and Applications of Optical Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill,

2010.
2. A.Ghatak & K.Thygarajan, “Introduction to Fiber Optics”, Cambridge, 1999.
3. J.Gowar, “Optical Communication Systems”, (2/e), PHI, 2001.
4. A.Selvarajan, S.Kar and T.Srinivas, “Optical Fiber Communication Principles and Systems”,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Recognize and classify the structures of Optical fiber and types.
CO2 Discuss the channel impairments like losses and dispersion.
CO3 Analyze various coupling losses.
CO4 Classify the Optical sources and detectors and to discuss their principle.
CO5 Familiar with Design considerations of fiber optic systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 174 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECMI28

Course Title : MICROWAVE ELECTRONICS
Type of Course : MI
Prerequisites : ECMI24
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of microwave electron beam devices and their applications
in X band frequency.

Course Content

Limitations of conventional vacuum tubes, Klystrons: Re-entrant cavities, Two cavity klystron, Velocity
modulation process, Bunching process ,Power output and efficiency; Multi-cavity klystron , Reflex
klystron-Velocity modulation process, Mode Characteristics ,Electronic admittance spiral.

Travelling-wave tubes: Slow-wave structures, Helix TWT- Amplification process, Convection current,
Wave modes and gain; coupled cavity TWT, Backward wave oscillator.

Crossed -field devices: Magnetrons- Principle of operation, characteristics, Hull cut-off condition;
Carcinotron, Gyrotron.

Microwave transistors and FETs: Microwave bipolar transistors-Physical structures, characteristics,

Power-frequency limitations; Microwave tunnel diode, Microwave unipolar transistor – Physical
structure, principle of operation, characteristics, High electron-mobility transistors.

Transferred electron and Avalanche transit-time devices: Gunn diode, Gunn diode as an oscillator.
IMPATT, TRAPATT and BARITT.

Text Books
1. S.Y.Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits (3/e)”, PHI, 2005.
2. R. F. Soohoo, “Microwave Electronics”, Wesley publication, 1971.
References
1. R.E.Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering (2/e)”, Wiley India, 2007.
2. D.M.Pozar,” Microwave Engineering (3/e)”, Wiley India, 2009.
3. K C Gupta, Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur,” Microwaves”, Wiley Eastern Limited,
1995.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Apply the basic knowledge of waveguide and microwave resonator circuits.
CO2 Asses the methods used for generation and amplification of the microwave power.
CO3 Distinguish between the linear and cross field electron beam microwave tubes.
CO4 Critically analyze the operating principles and performances of the microwave semiconductor
devices.
CO5 Identify the suitable microwave power sources of given specification for the selected
application.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 175 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

ESSENTIAL LABORATORY REQUIREMENT

(ELR)

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 176 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR10

Course Title : DEVICES AND NETWORKS LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC13
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content

List of Experiments:

1. Study Experiment
2. PN Junction Diode Characteristics
3. Zener diode characteristics and its application
4. Characteristics study of Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT)
5. Characteristics study of JFET
6. Response study of Series RLC
7. Constant K High pass Filter
8. Attenuators
9. Clippers and Clampers
10. Mini Project

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Demonstrate theoretical device/circuit operation in properly constructed analog

circuits.
CO2 Able to operate standard test equipment like multi-meters, oscilloscopes, power
supplies, waveform generators, and to analyze, test, and implement circuits in
breadboard.
CO3 Able to analyze the operation of an active device and compare its performance with
the expected performance given in the data sheets.
CO4 Able to apply troubleshooting techniques to test the circuits.
CO5 Able to analyze the circuits and concepts using the Mini project.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 177 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR11

Course Title : DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC14
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the correlation between Boolean
expressions
CLO2 To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions
CLO3 To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential
circuits
CLO4 To learn combinational and sequential circuit simulations using Verilog HDL

Course Content

1. Study of logic gates and verification of Boolean Laws.

2. Design of adders and subtractors, code converters.
3. Design of Multiplexers & Demultiplexers.
4. Design of magnitude comparators.
5. Design of encoders and decoders.
6. Study and implementation of flip-flops.
7. Design and implementation of counters using flip-flops.
8. Design and implementation of shift registers.
9. Simulation of combinational circuits using Verilog.
10. Simulation of Sequential circuits using Verilog.

References

1. John F.Wakerly, Digital Design, Fourth Edition, Pearson/PHI, 2006

2. John.M Yarbrough, Digital Logic Applications and Design, Thomson Learning, 2002.
3. Charles H.Roth. Fundamentals of Logic Design, Thomson Learning, 2003.
4. Donald P.Leach and Albert Paul Malvino, Digital Principles and Applications, 6th Edition,
TMH, 2003.
5. Charles H. Roth, Jr., Lizy Kurian John Digital Systems Design Using VHDL, 2nd Edition, PWS
Publishers, 1998.
6. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, 8th Edition, Pearson Education Inc, New Delhi,
2003
7. Donald D. Givone, Digital Principles and Design, TMH, 2003
8. M. M. Mano, “Digital Design”, 3rd ed., Pearson Education, Delhi, 2003.
9. Samir Palnitkar,” Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, 2nd Ed, Pearson
Education Inc, New Delhi, 2001

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Demonstrate theoretical device/circuit operation in properly constructed digital circuits.

CO2 Able to correctly operate standard electronic test equipment digital multi-meters, power
supplies to analyze, test, and implement digital circuits.
CO3 Able to correctly analyze a circuit and compare its theoretical performance to actual
performance.
CO4 Able to apply troubleshooting techniques to test digital circuits.
CO5 Able to code a given digital logic design in HDL language.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 178 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR12

Course Title : ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC17
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To analyze various biasing circuits

CLO2 To design the amplifiers
CLO3 To design the oscillators
CLO4 To design power amplifiers
CLO5 To design MOS based amplifiers and current mirror circuits

Course Content

Hardware Experiments
1. Stability of Q point
2. Single stage RC coupled CE amplifier
3. Single stage RC coupled Current series CE feedback amplifier
4. Darlington emitter follower
5. Differential Amplifier
6. RC phase shift oscillator
7. Colpitt’s Oscillator
8. Power amplifier – Class A & class AB

Simulation Experiments

9. MOS CS amplifier with resistive load, diode connected load, current source load
10. MOS current mirrors

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Demonstrate theoretical device/circuit operation in properly constructed analog

circuits
CO2 Able to correctly operate standard electronic test equipment digital multi-meters,
power supplies to analyze, test, and implement digital circuits
CO3 Able to correctly analyze a circuit and compare its theoretical performance to actual
performance
CO4 Learn different techniques employed for the enhancement of Gain and Bandwidth
CO5 Able to map the Circuits implemented to that of real time application

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 179 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR13

Course Title : MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER
LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC14
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 This course deals with several languages used for programming a Microprocessors
and Microcontrollers through industry-standard compilers, Macro Assemblers,
Debuggers, Real-time Kernels, and system-level simulators. Using the hardware
kits to get the hands-on experience on 16-bit Microprocessor, 8-bit and 16-bit
Microcontrollers and also interfacing the different peripherals.

Course Content

List of Experiments:

Intel 8086 – 16bit µP- Emulator.

1. Addressing modes of 8086 Microprocessor.

2. Block move and simple arithmetic operations.
3. Identification and displaying the activated key using DOS and BIOS function calls.

Intel 8051 (8-bit Microcontroller) - Proteus VSM Simulator and Trainer Kit.

4. Addressing modes of 8051 Microcontroller.

5. Delay generation - i) Nested loop and ii) Timers.
6. Toggling the ports and counting the pulses.
7. LCD Interfacing.
8. Generation of different waveforms using DAC (0808)
9. ADC interfacing.

Mixed-Signal Microcontroller –16bit –MSP430 series and Code Composer studio

10.PWM generation and speed control of Motors using MSP430.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Train their practical knowledge through laboratory experiments.

CO2 Understand and write the assembly language programs to control the systems.
CO3 Learn system-level simulator and design complete Microcontroller based modules.
CO4 Study Code Composer Studio to develop and debug embedded applications
CO5 Do projects in IoT applications.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 180 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR14

Course Title : ANALOG VLSI & EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC21& ECPC23
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content

List of Experiments:

1. Study the characteristics of negative feedback amplifier

2. Design of an instrumentation amplifier
3. Study the characteristics of regenerative feedback system-Schmitt trigger
4. Design of a second order Butterworth band-pass filter for the given higher and lower cut-
off frequencies
5. Design of a function generator-Square, Triangular wave

List of Experiments: USING XILINX

1. Comparators, parity generators & ALU

2. Flip-Flops, Shift-Registers & Counters Using Cadence
3. Dc transfer characteristics of an Inverter
4. Design, Simulation and Layout of basic digital blocks
5. Mini Project on VLSI Design

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Study the characteristics of negative feedback amplifier.

CO2 Design of an instrumentation amplifier.
CO3 Study the characteristics of regenerative feedback system- Schmitt trigger.
CO4 Design of a second order Butterworth band-pass filter for the given higher and lower
cut-off frequencies.
CO5 Design of a function generator- DSquare, Triangular wave.
CO6 To study, design and experimentally verify Comparators, Parity Generators and
ALU using XILINX.
CO7 Design of Flip-Flops, Shift-Registers & Counters Using XILINX.
CO8 Design and to study the DC transfer characteristics of an Inverter using Cadence.
CO9 Able to apply troubleshooting techniques to design, layout, simulate and test the
digital circuits as blocks.
CO10 Able to map the Circuits implemented to that of real time application.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 181 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR15

Course Title : DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To program and analyse the signal processing functions such as convolution,
correlation etc. using MATLAB tool.
CLO2 To learn and implement algorithms for FIR, IIR filters and DFT using FFT using
MATLAB tool.
CLO3 To learn the addressing modes and implement the DSP algorithms in digital signal
processors.
CLO4 To implement FIR and DFT in digital signal processor.

Course Content

List of Experiments:
MATLAB tool-based simulation experiments

1. Realization of correlation of two discrete signals

2. Realization of convolution
3. FIR filter design
4. IIR filter design
5. DFT implementation
6. SNR and Power spectral density estimation of signals

TMS320C5416 Digital Signal Processor kit-based Experiments

1. Study of various addressing modes and arithmetic sequence generation

2. Convolution using MAC, MACD and MACP instructions. Convolution using overlap add
and overlap save method
3. Wave pattern generation
4. FIR filter implementation
5. DFT implementation using FFT radix-2 algorithm
6. Serial interface and data acquisition

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 To write MATLAB program for signal processing functions

CO2 To implement algorithms to realize digital filters and transforms
CO3 To write and execute application program in digital signal processors
CO4 To implement signal processing algorithms in digital signal processors
CO5 To learn real time interfacing and data acquisition of signals

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 182 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR16

Course Title : COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC18 & ECPC19
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To get an understanding about the design of amplitude modulation techniques.

CLO2 To learn the fundamental design of analog pulse modulation schemes by varying
amplitude, position and width of the pulse signal.
CLO3 To design digital modulation circuits by keying the amplitude and frequency of the
carrier signal.
CLO4 To learn frequency multiplier circuit design using phase locked loop (PLL) IC.
CLO5 To implement analog and digital modulation circuits using Circuit and System level
simulators.

Course Content
List of Experiments:

1. Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation

2. DSBSC Modulation
3. Pulse Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation
4. Pulse Width Modulation and Demodulation
5. Pulse Position Modulation using PLL (IC 565)
6. Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK) Modulation and Demodulation
7. Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) Modulation and Demodulation
8. Frequency Multiplier using PLL
9. Sample and Hold circuit
10. Simulation of analog and digital modulation techniques using Circuit and System level
simulators.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 To design analog modulation schemes such as amplitude modulation and DSBSC
modulation.
CO2 To design analog pulse modulation schemes by varying amplitude, position and
width of the pulse signal.
CO3 To perform the digital modulation by designing circuits for keying the amplitude and
frequency of the carrier signal.
CO4 To perform frequency multiplication using phase locked loop.
CO5 To study the various modulation techniques using Circuit and System level
simulators.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 183 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECLR17

Course Title : MICROWAVE &FIBER OPTIC LABORATORY
Type of Course : ELR
Prerequisites : ECPC24
Contact Hours : 2
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content

List of Experiments:

Microwave Experiments

1. Study the characteristics of microwave sources (Gunn Diode, Reflex Klystron)

2. Impedance Measurement of unknown devices.
3. Study the characteristics of Reciprocal devices (Directional Coupler, E-Plane Tee, H-
Plane Tee etc.,)
4. Study the characteristics of Non-Reciprocal devices (Isolator, Circulator)
5. Study the Characteristics of horn Antenna.
6. Microwave CAD -Design and analysis of Planar Antenna

Fiber Optic Communication Experiments

1. Characteristics of Optical Sources - Laser Diode and LED

2. Characteristics of Photodetectors - PIN Photodetector and Avalanche Photodiode
(APD)
3. Characteristics of Optical Fiber-Measurement of Numerical Aperture, Attenuation,
Bending Loss and Fiber Dispersion
4. Analog and Voice Communication through Optical Link
5. Performance Measurement in Optical System-BER and Q-factor Estimation, Optical
Receiver Sensitivity Characteristics
6. Photonics CAD - WDM Link

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the characteristics of optical sources and photodetectors in the fiber
optic communication systems.
CO2 Understand the characteristics and various propagation effects of the optical fibers.
CO3 Construct analog and voice communication through optical fibers.
CO4 Analyze the performance parameters of the fiber optic communication systems
through simulation software.
CO5 Interpret the operating principle of wavelength division multiplexing systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 184 | P a g e

Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

HONORS (HO)

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 185 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO11

Course Title : SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF SIGNALS
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To give an exhaustive survey of methods available for power spectrum estimation.

Course Content

Periodogram and correlogram. Blackman – Tukey, Bartlett, Welch and Daniel methods.
Window design considerations.

Parametric methods for rational spectra. Covariance structure of ARMA processes. AR, MA
and ARMA signals. Multivariate ARMA signals.

Parametric methods for line spectra. Models of sinusoidal signals in noise. Nonlinear least
squares, high order Yule-Walker, min-norm, Pisarenko, MUSIC and ESPRIT methods.

Filter bank methods. Filter-bank interpretation of the periodogram. Refined filter-bank and
Capon methods.

Spatial methods. Array model. Nonparametric methods; beam forming and Capon method.
Parametric methods; nonlinear least squares, Yule-Walker, min-norm, Pisarenko, MUSIC and
ESPRIT methods.

References

1. P.Stoica & R.Moses, “Spectral Analysis of signals”, Pearson, 2005.

2. Marple, “Introduction to Spectral Analysis”, Prentice Hall.
3. S.M.Key, “Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall PTR, 1998.
4. Recent literature in Spectral Analysis of Signals.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Derive and analyse the statistical properties of the conventional spectral estimators,
namely the periodogram, averaged & modified periodogram and Blackman-Tukey
methods.
CO2 Formulate modern, parametric, spectral estimators based upon autoregressive (AR),
moving average (MA), and autoregresive moving average (ARMA) models, and detail
their statistical properties. Describe the consequence of the term resolution as applied
to a spectral estimator.
CO3 Define techniques for calculating moments in spectral and temporal domains; Analyze
filter bank method, capon methods for spectrum estimation.
CO4 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the principles of parametric and non-
parametric array processing algorithms.
CO5 Select an appropriate array processing algorithms for frequency estimation and sonar,
radar applications.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 186 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO12

Course Title : DETECTION AND ESTIMATION
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : MAIR45
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 The objective of this course is to make the students conversant with those aspects
of statistical decision and estimation which are indispensable tools required for the
optimal design of digital communication systems.

Course Content

Binary hypothesis testing; Bayes, minimax and Neyman-Pearson tests. Composite hypothesis
testing.

Signal detection in discrete time: Models and detector structures. Coherent detection in
independent noise. Detection in Gaussian noise. Detection of signals with random parameters.
Detection of stochastic signals. Performance evaluation of signal detection procedures.

Bayesian parameter estimation; MMSE, MMAE and MAP estimates. Nonrandom parameter
estimation. Exponential families. Completeness theorem. ML estimation. Information inequality.
Asymptotic properties of MLEs.

Discrete time Kalman- Bucy filter. Linear estimation. Orthogonality principle. Wiener-
Kolmogorov filtering – causal and non-causal filters.

Signal detection in continuous time: Detection of deterministic signals in Gaussian noise.

Coherent detection in white Gaussian noise.

References

1. H.V.Poor, “An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation (2/e) Springer”, 1994.
2. B.C.Levy, “Principles of Signal Detection and Parameter Estimation”, Springer, 2008.
3. H.L.Vantrees, “Detection, Estimation and Modulation theory”, Part I, Wiley, 1987.
4. M.D.Srinath & P.K.Rajasekaran, “Statistical Signal Processing with Applications”, Wiley,
1979.
5. J.C.Hancock & P.A. Wintz, “Signal Detection Theory”, Mc-Graw Hill, 1966.
6. Recent literature in Detection and Estimation.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Summarize the fundamental concept on Statistical Decision Theory and Hypothesis
Testing
CO2 Summarize the various signal estimation techniques with additive noise
CO3 Summarizer with Bayesian parameter estimation (minimum mean square error
(MMSE), minimum mean absolute error (MMAE), maximum a-posterior probability
(MAP) estimation methods).
CO4 Compare optimal filtering, linear estimation, and Wiener/Kalman filtering.
CO5 Construct Wiener and Kalman filters (time discrete) and state space models.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 187 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO13

Course Title : WAVELET SIGNAL PROCESSING
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the basics of wavelet theory and to illustrate the use of
wavelet processing for data compression and noise suppression.

Course Content

Limitations of standard Fourier analysis. Windowed Fourier transform. Continuous wavelet

transform. Time-frequency resolution.

Multiresolution analysis and properties. The Haar wavelet, Structure of subspaces in MRA

Haar decomposition-1, Haar decomposition-2, Wavelet reconstruction, Haar wavelet and link to
filter bank, demo on wavelet decomposition, Wavelet packets

Wavelet methods for signal processing. Noise suppression. Representation of noise-corrupted

signals using frames. Algorithm for reconstruction from corrupted frame representation.

Wavelet methods for image processing. Burt- Adelson and Mallat’s pyramidal decomposition
schemes. 2D-dyadic wavelet transform.

References

1. E.Hernandez & G.Weiss, A First Course on Wavelets, CRC Press, 1996.

2. L.Prasad & S.S.Iyengar, Wavelet Analysis with Applications to Image Processing, CRC
Press, 1997.
3. A.Teolis, Computational Signal Processing with Wavelets, Birkhauser, 1998
4. R.M. Rao & A.S. Bopardikar, Wavelet Transforms, Addition Wesley, 1998.
5. J.C. Goswami & A.K. Chan, Fundamentals of Wavelets, John Wiley, 1999.
6. Recent literature in Wavelet Signal Processing.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand about windowed Fourier transform and difference between windowed
Fourier transform and wavelet transform.
CO2 Understand wavelet basis and characterize continuous and discrete wavelet
transforms
CO3 Understand multi resolution analysis and identify various wavelets and evaluate their
time-frequency resolution properties
CO4 Implement discrete wavelet transforms in signal processing applications
CO5 Understand about wavelet methods in image processing

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 188 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO14

Course Title : RF CIRCUITS
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To impart knowledge on basics of IC design at RF frequencies.

Course Content

Characteristics of passive IC components at RF frequencies – interconnects, resistors, capacitors,

inductors and transformers – Transmission lines. Noise – classical two-port noise theory, noise
models for active and passive components High frequency amplifier design – zeros as
bandwidth enhancers, shunt-series amplifier, fdoublers ,neutralization and uni-lateralization

Low noise amplifier design – LNA topologies, power constrained noise optimization, linearity and
large signal performance

Mixers – multiplier-based mixers, subsampling mixers, diode-ring mixers

RF power amplifiers – Class A, AB, B, C, D, E and F amplifiers, modulation of power amplifiers,

linearity considerations

Oscillators & synthesizers – describing functions, resonators, negative resistance oscillators,

synthesis with static moduli, synthesis with dithering moduli, combination synthesizers – phase
noise considerations.

References

1. Thomas H. Lee, “The Design of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits”, 2nd ed.,
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press,2004.
2. B.Razavi, “RF Microelectronics”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, 1998.
3. A.A. Abidi, P.R. Gray, and R.G. Meyer, eds., “Integrated Circuits for Wireless
Communications”, New York: IEEE Press,1999.
4. R. Ludwig and P. Bretchko, “RF Circuit Design, Theory and Applications”, Pearson,2000.
5. Mattuck,A., “Introduction to Analysis”,Prentice-Hall,1998.
6. Recent literature in RF Circuits.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the Noise models for passive components and noise theory
CO2 Analyze the design of a high frequency amplifier
CO3 Appreciate the different LNA topologies & design techniques
CO4 Distinguish between different types of mixers
CO5 Analyse the various types of synthesizers, oscillators and their characteristics.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 189 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO15

Course Title : NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES FOR MIC
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC25
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 This subject will prepare the student to face the challenging problem of the most
important component of Research namely the numerical analysis.

Course Content

Over view of Numerical Techniques for Microwave integrated Circuits: Introduction, Quasi
Static and Full wave Analysis, Outline if Finite element method, Integral Equation Technique,
Planar Circuit Analysis, Spectral Domain Approach, The Method of Lines, The Mode Matching
Method, The Transverse Resonance Technique

The Finite Element Method: Introduction, The Method of Weighted Residuals, The Variational
Method Using a Variational Expression, The Finite Element Method, Integral Formulation of
Problems, Antennas and Scattering from Conductors ,Waveguides-Hollow, Dielectric and
Optical Finite Difference in space and Time Matrix Computations. A Finite Element Computer
Program for Micro strips

Planar Circuit Analysis: Introduction, Planar Circuit Analysis’ Function Approach Impedance
Green’s Functions Contour Integral Approach Analysis of Planar Components of Composite
Configurations Planar Circuits with Anisotropic Spacing Media Applications of the Planar
Circuits Concept Summary

Spectral Domain Approach: Introduction, General Approach for Shielded Microstrip Lines, the
Admittance Approach Formulations for Slot lines, Fin lines, and Coplanar Waveguides
Numerical Computation

Transverse Resonance Technique: Introduction, Inhomogeneous Waveguides Uniform along

a Traverse Coordinate, Conventional Traverse Resonance Technique for Transversely
Discontinuous Waveguides, Generalized Transverse Resonance Technique for Transversely
Discontinuous Inhomogeneous Analysis of Discontinuities and Junctions by the Generalized
Transverse Resonance Technique, Examples of Computer Programs.
References

1. T.Itoh, Numerical Techniques for Microwave Integrated Circuits., John Wiley and
sons,1989.
2. Cam Nguyen,Analysis Methods FOR RF,Microwave AND Millimeter_wave Planar
Transmission Line Structures, John Wiley & Sons, INC.2000.
3. Bharathi Bhat, Shiban K.Koul, Analysis, Design and Applications of Fin lines. Artech
House. 1987.
4. Recent literature in numerical techniques for microwave integrated circuits.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 190 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Bring awareness of the need for numerical analysis of M.I.C. And prepare to formulate
all popular numerical techniques of M.I.C.
CO2 Make one formulate and write coding for Finite Element Method
CO3 Prepare a person to be strong in the planar circuit Analysis
CO4 Bring awareness of the most popular quasi state analysis Spectral Domain Techniques
CO5 Prepare the student formulate and write coding for the Transverse Resonance
Techniques

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 191 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO16

Course Title : APPLIED PHOTONICS
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To prepare the students understand the fundamental principles of light-matter interaction
and photonic band gap structures.
CLO2 To enable the students appreciate the diverse applications of fiberoptic sensors.

Course Content

Introduction to photonics; optical waveguide theory; Interference of light waves -numerical

techniques and simulation

Photonic waveguide components Optical Modulators and Switches Electro-optics - Acousto-

optics - Magneto-optics

Photonic Band gap Structures: Concept of photonic crystal; band gap and band structures in 1D,
2D and 3D photonic crystal structures;

Photo-refractive materials, non-linear optics, recent trends in bio and nano-photonics

Optical fiber sensors - Sensing using optical fibers - Types:-Amplitude, Inter-ferometric,

Wavelength, Polarimetric – Distributed Sensors

References

1. A. Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, “Introduction to Fiber Optics”, Cambridge University

Press,2006.
2. Pochi Yeh and Amnon Yariv, Photonics: Optical Electronics in Modern
Communications, 2007
3. F. T. S. Yu and S.Yin, “Fiber Optic Sensors”, Marcel Dekker, Inc2002
4. G. W. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics “,Pearson Education, 1stedition,2008
5. B. Saleh and M. Teich, “Fundamentals of Photonics”, Wiley & Sons, 2007
6. Recent literature in Applied Photonics

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the interference of light and optical waveguide theory.

CO2 Understand the significance of photonic band gap structures and their application
CO3 Analyze the different types of optical modulators.
CO4 Compare the merits and demerits of different types of fiber optic sensors.
CO5 Understand the application of nonlinear optics in bio and nano-photonics.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 192 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO17

Course Title : ADVANCED RADIATION SYSTEMS
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC20
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To prepare the students understand the operating principles of various RF radiating systems.
CLO2 To enable the students appreciate the diverse applications of radiating systems.
CLO3 To design the suitable antenna systems to serve a defined application.

Course Content
Antenna Fundamentals

Antenna fundamental parameters, Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface and line current
distributions – dipole, monopole, loop antenna; Broadband antennas and matching techniques,
Balance to unbalance transformer, Introduction to numerical techniques.
Apertures Antennas

Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform aperture
distribution on an infinite ground plane; Slot antenna; Horn antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture
blockage, and design consideration.
Arrays

General structure of phased array, linear array theory, variation of gain as a function of pointing
direction, frequency scanned arrays, digital beam forming, and MEMS technology in phased
arrays-Retro directive and self-phased arrays.

Micro Strip Antenna

Radiation Mechanism from patch; Excitation techniques; Microstrip dipole; Rectangular patch,
Circular patch, and Ring antenna – radiation analysis from transmission line model, cavity model;
input impedance of rectangular and circular patch antenna; Application of microstrip array
antenna.

Terahertz Planar Antennas

Electronics band gap materials - Photonic Band-gap Structures- Tera Hertz Patch antennas-
Special antenna structures.
References
1. Balanis. A, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 3rd
Edition, 1982.
2. Frank B. Gross, “Frontiers in Antennas”, Mc Graw Hill, 2011.
3. S. Drabowitch, A. Papiernik, H.D.Griffiths, J.Encinas, B.L.Smith, “Modern Antennas”,
Springer Publications, 2nd Edition, 2007.
4. Krauss.J.D, “Antennas”, John Wiley and sons, New York, 2nd Edition, 1997.
5. I.J. Bahl and P. Bhartia, “Microstrip Antennas”, Artech House,Inc.,1980
6. W.L.Stutzman and G.A.Thiele, “Antenna Theory and Design”, John Wiley& Sons Inc., 2nd
Edition, 1998.
7. Jim R. James, P.S.Hall ,”Handbook of Microstrip Antennas” IEE Electromagnetic wave
series 28, Volume 2,1989.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 193 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Understand the various antenna parameters and different impedance matching
techniques.
CO2 Understand the working principle of apertures antennas.
CO3 Analyze how the electronic beam formation is done using array of antennas.
CO4 Compare the merits and demerits of various microwave patch antenna structures.
CO5 Understand the photonic band gap structures and its application in tera hertz antennas

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 194 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO18

Course Title : BIO MEMS
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To train the students in the design aspects of Bio MEMS devices and Systems. To
make the students aware of applications in various medical specialists especially
the Comparison of conventions methods and Bio MEMS usage.

Course Content

Introduction-The driving force behind Biomedical Applications-Biocompatibility-Reliability

Considerations-Regularity Considerations-Organizations-Education of Bio MEMS-Silicon Micro
fabrication-Soft Fabrication techniques

Micro fluidic Principles- Introduction-Transport Processes- Electro kinetic Phenomena-Micro

valves –Micro mixers- Micro-pumps.

SENSOR PRINCIPLES and MICRO SENSORS: Introduction-Fabrication-Basic Sensors-Optical

fibers- Piezo electricity and SAW devices-Electrochemical detection-Applications in Medicine

MICRO ACTUATORS and DRUG DELIVERY: Introduction-Activation Methods-Micro actuators for

Micro fluidics-equivalent circuit representation-Drug Delivery

MICRO TOTAL ANALYSIS: Lab on Chip-Capillary Electrophoresis Arrays-cell, molecule and

Particle Handling-Surface Modification-Microsphere-Cell based Bioassay Systems Detection and
Measurement Methods-Emerging Bio MEMS Technology-Packaging, Power, Data and RF Safety-
Biocompatibility, Standards

References
1. S.S. Saliterman,” Fundamentals of Bio MEMS and Medical Micro devices”, Wiley
Interscience, 2006.
2. A. Folch ,”Introduction to Bio MEMS”, CRC Press,2012
3. G.A. Urban, “Bio MEMS”, Springer,2006
4. W. wang, S.A. Soper,” Bio MEMS”, 2006.
5. M. J. Madou, “Fundamental of Micro fabrication”,2002.
6. G.T. A. Kovacs, “Micro machined Transducers Source book”, 1998.
7. Recent literature in Bio MEMS.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Learn and realize the MEMS applications in Bio Medical Engineering
CO2 Understand the Micro fluidic Principles and study its applications.
CO3 Learn the applications of Sensors in Health Engineering.
CO4 Learn the principles of Micro Actuators and Drug Delivery system
CO5 Learn the principles and applications of Micro Total Analysis

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 195 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO19

Course Title : ANALOG IC DESIGN
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC21
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To develop the ability design and analyze MOS based Analog VLSI circuits to draw the
equivalent circuits of MOS based Analog VLSI and analyse their performance.
CLO2 To develop the skills to design analog VLSI circuits for a given specification.

Course Content

Basic MOS Device Physics – General Considerations, MOS I/V Characteristics, Second Order
effects, MOS Device models. Short Channel Effects and Device Models. Single Stage Amplifiers –
Basic Concepts, Common Source Stage, Source Follower, Common Gate Stage, Cascode Stage.

Differential Amplifiers – Single Ended and Differential Operation, Basic Differential Pair,
Common-Mode Response, Differential Pair with MOS loads, Gilbert Cell. Passive and Active
Current Mirrors – Basic Current Mirrors, Cascode Current Mirrors, Active Current Mirrors.

Frequency Response of Amplifiers – General Considerations, Common Source Stage, Source

Followers, Common Gate Stage, Cascode Stage, Differential Pair. Noise – Types of Noise,
Representation of Noise in circuits, Noise in single stage amplifiers, Noise in Differential Pairs.

Feedback Amplifiers – General Considerations, Feedback Topologies, Effect of Loading.

Operational Amplifiers – General Considerations, One Stage Op Amps, Two Stage Op Amps, Gain
Boosting, Common-Mode Feedback, Input Range limitations, Slew Rate, Power Supply Rejection,
Noise in Op Amps. Stability and Frequency Compensation.

Band gap References, Introduction to Switched Capacitor Circuits, Nonlinearity and Mismatch.

References
1. B.Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill Edition2002.
2. Paul. R.Gray, Robert G. Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, Wiley,
(4/e), 2001.
3. D. A. Johns and K. Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, Wiley,1997.
4. R. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation”, Wiley, (3/e),2010.
5. P.E.Allen, D.R. Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press,2002.
6. Recent literature in Analog IC Design.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Draw the equivalent circuits of MOS based Analog VLSI and analyze their performance.
CO2 Design analog VLSI circuits for a givens pecification.
CO3 Analyse the frequency response of the different configurations of a amplifier.
CO4 Understand the feedback topologies involved in the amplifier design.
CO5 Appreciate the design features of the differential amplifiers.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 196 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO20

Course Title : VLSI SYSTEM TESTING
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC23
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students, the basics of testing techniques for VLSI circuits and Test
Economics.

Course Content

Basics of Testing: Fault models, Combinational logic and fault simulation, Test generation for
Combinational Circuits. Current sensing based testing. Classification of sequential ATPG methods.
Fault collapsing and simulation

Universal test sets: Pseudo-exhaustive and iterative logic array testing. Clocking schemes for
delay fault testing. Testability classifications for path delay faults. Test generation and fault
simulation for path and gate delay faults.

CMOS testing: Testing of static and dynamic circuits. Fault diagnosis: Fault models for diagnosis,
Cause- effect diagnosis, Effect-cause diagnosis.

Design for testability: Scan design, Partial scan, use of scan chains, boundary scan, DFT for other
test objectives, Memory Testing.

Built-in self-test: Pattern Generators, Estimation of test length, Test points to improve testability,
Analysis of aliasing in linear compression, BIST methodologies, BIST for delay fault testing.

References
1. N. Jha& S.D. Gupta, “Testing of Digital Systems”, Cambridge,2003.
2. W. W. Wen, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures Design for Testability”, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers.2006
3. Michael L. Bushnell &Vishwani D. Agrawal,” Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital,
memory & Mixed signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwar Academic Publishers.2000.
4. P. K. Lala,” Digital circuit Testing and Testability”, Academic Press.1997.
5. M. Abramovici, M. A. Breuer, and A.D. Friedman, “Digital System Testing and Testable
Design”, Computer Science Press,1990.
6. Recent literature in VLSI System Testing.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Apply the concepts in testing which can help them design a better yield in IC design.
CO2 Tackle the problems associated with testing of semiconductor circuits at earlier design
levels so as to significantly reduce the testing costs.
CO3 Analyze the various test generation methods for static & dynamic CMOS circuits.
CO4 Identify the design for testability methods for combinational & sequential CMOS
circuits.
CO5 Recognize the BIST techniques for improving testability.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 197 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO22

Course Title : DESIGN OF ASICS
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : VLSI Design
Contact Hours : (3-1-0) 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To prepare the student to be an entry-level industrial standard ASIC or FPGA designer.
CLO2 To give the student an understanding of issues and tools related to ASIC/FPGA design
and implementation.
CLO3 To give the student an understanding of High-performance algorithms.
CLO4 To give the student an understanding of basics of System on Chip and Platform based
design.

Course Content

Introduction to Technology, Types of ASICs, VLSI Design flow, Design and Layout Rules,
Programmable ASICs – Anti-fuse, SRAM, EPROM, EEPROM based ASICs. Programmable ASIC logic
cells and I/O cells. Programmable interconnects. Advanced FPGAs and CPLDs and Soft-core
processors. Self-Study: Multi-core processors, High performance computing (HPC), Cache, High
speed memories (DDR4), High speed serdes (56Gbps, PAM4), GPU.

ASIC physical design issues, System Partitioning, Floorplanning and Placement. Algorithms: K-L,
FM, Simulated annealing algorithms. Full Custom Design: Basics, Needs & Applications. Schematic
and layout basics, Full Custom Design Flow.

Semicustom Approach: Synthesis (RTL to GATE netlist) - Introduction to Constraints (SDC),

Introduction to Static Timing Analysis (STA). Place and Route (Logical to Physical
Implementation): Floorplan and Power-Plan, Placement, Clock Tree Synthesis (clock planning),
Routing, Timing Optimization, GDS generation.

Overview of Extraction, Logical equivalence and STA: Parasitic Extraction Flow, STA: Timing
Flow, LEC. Introduction to Physical Verification flow and Tools used: Introduction, DRC, LVS and
basics of DFM. High performance algorithms for FPGA & ASICs – Multiplier, Canonic Signed Digit
Arithmetic, KCM, Distributed Arithmetic, High performance digital filters for sigma-delta ADC.

System-On-Chip Design - SoC Design Flow, Platform-based and IP based SoC Designs, Basic
Concepts of Bus-Based Communication Architectures. Case study: FSM design, clock domain
crossing, FIFOs. Core (ARM) and IOs (I2C, PWM, GPIO, SPI, NAND, Ethernet, USB, High speed
serdes etc. are interconnected through AXI/APB buses (protocols and interconnects)

References
1. M.J.S. Smith : Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson, 2003
2. Sudeep Pasricha and NikilDutt, On-Chip Communication Architectures System on Chip
Interconnect, Elsevier, 2008
3. H.Gerez, Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation, John Wiley, 1999
4. Jan.M.Rabaey et al, Digital Integrated Circuit Design Perspective (2/e), PHI 2003
5. David A.Hodges, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits (3/e), MGH 2004
6. Hoi-Jun Yoo, Kangmin Leeand Jun Kyong Kim, Low-Power NoC for High-Performance SoC
Design, CRC Press, 2008

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 198 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able

CO1 Demonstrate VLSI tool-flow and appreciate FPGA and CPLD architectures.
CO2 Understand the algorithms used for ASIC construction. Understand Full Custom Design
Flow and Tool used.
CO3 Understand Semicustom Design Flow and Tool used - from RTL to GDS and Logical to
Physical Implementation.
CO4 Understand about STA, LEC, DRC, LVS, DFM.
CO5 Understand the System on Chip Design and On-chip communication architectures with
case studies.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 199 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO23

Course Title : DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC14
Contact Hours : (3-1-0) 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To get an idea about designing complex, high speed digital systems and how to
implement such design.

Course Content

Mapping algorithms into Architectures: Datapath synthesis, control structures, critical path and
worst case timing analysis. FSM and Hazards.

Combinational network delay. Power and energy optimization in combinational logic circuit.
Sequential machine design styles. Rules for clocking. Performance analysis.

Sequencing static circuits. Circuit design of latches and flip-flops. Static sequencing element
methodology. Sequencing dynamic circuits. Synchronizers.

Data path and array subsystems: Addition / Subtraction, Comparators, counters, coding,
multiplication and division. SRAM, DRAM, ROM, serial access memory, context addressable
memory.

Reconfigurable Computing- Fine grain and Coarse grain architectures, Configuration

architectures-Single context, Multi context, partially reconfigurable, Pipeline reconfigurable,
Block Configurable, Parallel processing.

References
1. N.H.E.Weste, D. Harris, CMOS VLSI Design (3/e), Pearson,2005.
2. W.Wolf, FPGA- based System Design, Pearson,2004.
3. S. Hauck, A.DeHon, ”Reconfigurable computing: the theory and practice of FPGA-based
computation”, Elsevier, 2008.
4. Franklin P. Prosser, David E. Winkel, Art of Digital Design, Prentice-Hall,1987.
5. R.F.Tinde,” Engineering Digital Design”, (2/e), Academic Press,2000.
6. C. Bobda, “Introduction to reconfigurable computing”, Springer, 2007.
7. M. Gokhale, ”Paul S. Graham, Reconfigurable computing: accelerating computation with
field- programmable gate arrays”, Springer,2005.
8. C.Roth, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design”, Jaico Publishers, V ed.,2009.
9. Recent literature in Digital System Design.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Identify mapping algorithms into architectures.
CO2 Summarize various delays in combinational circuit and its optimization methods.
CO3 Summarize circuit design of latches and flip-flops.
CO4 Construct combinational and sequential circuits of medium complexity that is based on
VLSIs, and programmable logic devices.
CO5 Summarize the advanced topics such as reconfigurable computing, partially
reconfigurable, Pipeline reconfigurable architectures and block configurable.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 200 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO24

Course Title : OPTIMIZATIONS OF DIGITAL SIGNAL
PROCESSING STRUCTURES FOR VLSI
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC23 - VLSI SYSTEMS
ECPE18 - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND
APPLICATIONS
ECPC15 - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Contact Hours : (3-1-0) 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To enable students to develop a practical understanding of VLSI implementing DSP
algorithms with optimized hardware.
CLO2 To enable students to design filters with high speed and low power using pipelining
methodologies
CLO3 To understand Systolic Architecture designs and efficient date driven architectures for
DSP applications
CLO4 To encourage students to know the limitations of synchronous designs and
exploration of Asynchronous design techniques

Course Content

An overview of DSP concepts, Pipelining of FIR filters. Parallel processing of FIR filters. Pipelining
and parallel processing for low power, Combining Pipelining and Parallel Processing.

Transformation Techniques: Iteration bound, Retiming, Folding and Unfolding

Pipeline interleaving in digital filters. Pipelining and Parallel processing for IIR filters. Low power
IIR filter design using pipelining and parallel processing, Pipelined adaptive digital filters.

Systolic Architecture Design: Systolic Array Design Methodology, FIR Systolic Arrays, Selection of
Scheduling Vector. Redundant arithmetic: Redundant Number Representations, Carry-Free
Radix-2 addition and subtraction, Hybrid radix-4 addition, Radix-2 hybrid redundant
multiplication architectures.

Synchronous pipelining and clocking styles, clock skew and clock distribution in bit level
pipelined VLSI designs. Wave pipelining, constraint space diagram and degree of wave pipelining,
Implementation of wave-pipelined systems, Asynchronous pipelining.

References
1. K.K.Parhi, VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems, John-Wiley, reprint 2011
2. FPGA-based Implementation of Signal Processing Systems, 2nd Edition by Roger Woods
et al., 2017
3. Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays by Uwe Meyer-Baese,
reprint 2007
4. Magdy A. Bayoumi, VLSI Design Methodologies for Digital Signal Processing, 2012
5. VLSI Design Methodologies for Digital Signal Processing Architectures by Parhi and
Nishitan, First Edition, 2005
6. VLSI Signal Processing Technology edited by Magdy A. Bayoumi and Earl E. Swartzlander,
First Edition, 2012

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 201 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the overview of DSP concepts and design architectures for DSP algorithms.
CO2 Improve the overall performance of DSP system through various transformation and
optimization techniques.
CO3 Perform pipelining and parallel processing on FIR and IIR systems to achieve high
speed and low power.
CO4 Representation of a network of processing elements (PEs) that rhythmically compute
and pass data through the system, and able to design basic arithmetic units and realize
their architecture with higher radices
CO5 Understand clock-based issues, different clock styles and design asynchronous and
wave pipelined systems.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 202 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO26

Course Title : VLSI DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC23 - VLSI SYSTEMS
ECPE18 - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND
APPLICATIONS
ECPC15 - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To enable students to design VLSI systems with high speed and low power.
CLO2 To encourage students to develop a working knowledge of the central ideas of
implementation of DSP algorithm with optimized hardware.

Course Content

An overview of DSP concepts, Representations of DSP algorithms. Systolic Architecture Design:

FIR Systolic Array, Matrix-Matrix Multiplication, 2D Systolic Array Design. Digital Lattice Filter
Structures: Schur Algorithm, Derivation of One-Multiplier Lattice Filter, Normalized Lattice Filter,
Pipelining of Lattice Filter.

Scaling and Round off Noise - State variable description of digital filters, Scaling and Round off
Noise computation, Round off Noise in Pipelined IIR Filters, Round off Noise Computation using
state variable description, Slow-down, Retiming and Pipelining.

Bit level arithmetic Architectures- parallel multipliers, interleaved floor-plan and bit-plane-based
digital filters, Bit serial multipliers, Bit serial filter design and implementation, Canonic signed
digit arithmetic, Distributed arithmetic.

Redundant arithmetic -Redundant number representations, carry free radix-2 addition and
subtraction, Hybrid radix-4 addition, Radix-2 hybrid redundant multiplication architectures, data
format conversion, Redundant to Non redundant converter.

Numerical Strength Reduction – Sub expression Elimination, Multiple Constant Multiplication,

Sub expression sharing in Digital Filters, Additive and Multiplicative Number Splitting.

References
1. K.K.Parhi, “VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems”, John-Wiley, 2007
2. U. Meyer -Baese, Digital Signal Processing with FPGAs, Springer, 2004
3. Recent literature in VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Acquire the knowledge of round off noise computation and numerical strength
reduction.
CO2 Ability to design Bit level and redundant arithmetic Architectures.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 203 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO27

Course Title : ASYNCHRONOUS SYSTEM DESIGN
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC14
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 This subject introduces the fundamentals and performance of Asynchronous system
CLO2 To familiarize the dependency graphical analysis of signal transmission graphs
CLO3 To learn software languages and its syntax and operations for implementing Asynchronous
Designs

Course Content

Fundamentals: Handshake protocols, Muller C-element, Muller pipeline, Circuit implementation

styles, theory. Static data-flow structures: Pipelines and rings, Building blocks, examples
Performance: A quantitative view of performance, quantifying performance, Dependency
graphic analysis. Handshake circuit implementation: Fork, join, and merge, Functional blocks,
mutual exclusion, arbitration and Metastability.
Speed-independent control circuits: Signal Transition graphs, Basic Synthesis Procedure,
Implementation using state-holding gates, Summary of the synthesis Process, Design examples
using Petrify. Advanced 4- phase bundled data protocols and circuits: Channels and protocols,
Static type checking, more advanced latch control circuits.
High-level languages and tools: Concurrency and message passing in CSP, Tangram program
examples, Tangram syntax-directed compilation, Martin’s translation process, Using VHDL for
Asynchronous Design. An Introduction to Balsa: Basic concepts, Tool set and design flow,
Ancillary Balsa Tools
The Balsa language: Data types, Control flow and commands, Binary/Unary operators, Program
structure. Building library Components: Parameterized descriptions, Recursive definitions. A
simple DMA controller: Global Registers, Channel Registers, DMA control structure, The Balsa
description.
References
1. Asynchronous Circuit Design- Chris. J. Myers, John Wiley &Sons, 2001.
2. Handshake Circuits An Asynchronous architecture for VLSI programming –
3. Principles of Asynchronous Circuit Design-Jens Sparso, Steve Furber, Kluver Academic
Publishers, 2001.
4. Asynchronous Sequential Machine Design and Analysis, Richard F. Tinder,2009
5. A Designer's Guide to Asynchronous VLSI, Peter A. Beerel, Recep O. Ozdag, Marcos
Ferretti,2010
6. Recent literature in Asynchronous System Design

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the fundamentals of Asynchronous protocols
CO2 Analyze the performance of Asynchronous System and implement handshake circuits
CO3 Understand the various control circuits and Asynchronous system modules
CO4 Gain the experience in using high level languages and tools for Asynchronous Design
CO5 Learn commands and control flow of Balsa language for implementing Asynchronous
Designs

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 204 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO28

Course Title : PHYSICAL DESIGN AUTOMATION
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 Understand the concepts of Physical Design Process such as partitioning, Floor planning,
Placement and Routing.
CLO2 Discuss the concepts of design optimization algorithms and their application to physical
design automation.
CLO3 Understand the concepts of simulation and synthesis in VLSI Design Automation
CLO4 Formulate CAD design problems using algorithmic methods

Course Content

VLSI design automation tools- algorithms and system design. Structural and logic design.
Transistor level design. Layout design. Verification methods. Design management tools.

Layout compaction, placement and routing. Design rules, symbolic layout. Applications of
compaction. Formulation methods. Algorithms for constrained graph compaction. Circuit
representation. Wire length estimation. Placement algorithms. Partitioning algorithms.

Floor planning and routing- floor planning concepts. Shape functions and floor planning sizing.
Local routing. Area routing. Channel routing, global routing and its algorithms.

Simulation and logic synthesis- gate level and switch level modeling and simulation.
Introduction to combinational logic synthesis. ROBDD principles, implementation, construction
and manipulation. Two level logic synthesis.

High-level synthesis- hardware model for high level synthesis. Internal representation of input
algorithms. Allocation, assignment and scheduling. Scheduling algorithms. Aspects of assignment.
High level transformations.

References
1. S.H. Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, JohnWiley, 1998.
2. N.A.Sherwani, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation”, (3/e),Kluwer, 1999.
3. S.M. Sait, H. Youssef, “VLSI Physical Design Automation”, World scientific,1999.
4. M.Sarrafzadeh, “Introduction to VLSI Physical Design”, McGraw Hill (IE),1996.
5. Recent literature in Physical Design Automation.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Know how to place the blocks and how to partition the blocks while for designing the
layout for IC.
CO2 Solve the performance issues in circuit layout.
CO3 Analyze physical design problems and Employ appropriate automation algorithms for
partitioning, floor planning, placement and routing
CO4 Decompose large mapping problem into pieces, including logic optimization with
partitioning, placement and routing
CO5 Analyze circuits using both analytical and CAD tools

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 205 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO29

Course Title : MIXED - SIGNAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : NONE
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To make the students to understand the design and performance measures
concept of mixed signal circuit.

Course Content

Concepts of Mixed-Signal Design and Performance Measures. Fundamentals of Data Converters.

Nyquist Rate Converters and Over sampling Converters.

Design methodology for mixed signal IC design using gm/Id concept.

Design of Current mirrors. References. Comparators and Operational Amplifiers.

CMOS Digital Circuits Design: Design of MOSFET Switches and Switched-Capacitor Circuits,
Layout Considerations.

Design of frequency and Q tunable continuous time filters.

References
1. R. Jacob Baker, Harry W. Li, David E. Boyce, CMOS, Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation,
Wiley-IEEE Press,1998
2. David A. Johns and Ken Martin, Analog Integrated Circuit Design, John Wiley and
Sons,1997.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Appreciate the fundamentals of data converters and also optimized their
performances.
CO2 Understand the design methodology for mixed signal IC design using gm/Id concept.
CO3 Analyze the design of current mirrors and operational amplifiers
CO4 Design the CMOS digital circuits and implement its layout.
CO5 Design the frequency and Q tunable time domain filters.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 206 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO30

Course Title : DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING FOR MEDICAL
IMAGING
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Content

Sources of Medical Images: Physics of X-ray, CT, PET, MRI, and ultrasound, advantages and
disadvantages of each imaging modality.

Image Enhancement: Contrast adjustment, denoising (convolution, FFT), deblurring (solving an ill-
conditioned sparse linear system), edge detection (numerical approximation to a partial derivative),
anisotropic diffusion (numerical solution of partial differential equations), super-resolution.

Registration: Intensity-based methods, including a variety of cost functions (correlation, least squares,
mutual information, robust estimators), and optimization techniques (fixed-point iteration, gradient
descent, etc.). Implement registration for rigid and non-rigid transformations. MRI motion
compensation.

Segmentation & tissue classification: Thresholding, region growing and watershed. More depth on
the method of snakes (adaptive mesh), level set method (numerical solution of partial differential
equations), and clustering (classifiers).
Reconstruction Methods: Reconstruction techniques for CT (filtered back projection) and MRI (using
the FFT). Theory of the Radon transform, the Fourier transform, and how they relate to each other.

References
1. Jerry L. Prince, Jonathan M. Links, Medical imaging signals and systems, Pearson
education, second edition, 2014
2. Mark. A. Haidekkar, Medical Imaging technology, Springer briefs in physics,2013.
3. Paul suetens, Fundamentals of medical imaging, second edition, Cambridge university
press, 2009.
4. Recent literature in Digital Signal Processing for Medical Imaging.
5. Geoff Dougherty, Digital image processing for medical applications, Cambridge press

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Describe about different medical imaging modalities and its advantages and
disadvantages
CO2 Describe the signal processing techniques involved in medical image enhancement
techniques
CO3 Describe the signal processing techniques involved in image registration
CO4 Describe the signal processing techniques involved in segmentation and classification
CO5 Describe the signal processing techniques involved in image reconstruction.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 207 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO31

Course Title : Advanced Techniques for Wireless Reception
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites :
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To get an understanding of signal processing techniques for emerging wireless
systems.

Course Content

Wireless signaling environment. Basic signal processing for wireless reception. Linear receivers for
synchronous CDMA. Blind and group-blind multiuser detection methods. Performance issues.

Robust multiuser detection for non-Gaussian channels; asymptotic performance , implementation

aspects.

Adaptive array processing in TDMA systems. Optimum space-time multiuser detection. Turbo
multiuser detection for synchronous and turbo coded CDMA.

Narrowband interface suppression. Linear and nonlinear predictive techniques. Code- aided techniques.
Performance comparison.

Signal Processing for wireless reception: Bayesian and sequential Montecarlo signal processing. Blind
adaptive equalization of MIMO channels .Signal processing for fading channels. Coherent detection
based on the EM algorithm. Decision-feedback differential detection. Signal processing for coded
OFDM systems.

References
1. X.Wang & H.V.Poor, “Wireless Communication Systems”, Pearson, 2004.
2. R.Janaswamy, “Radio Wave Propagation and Smart Antennas for Wireless
Communication”, Kluwer, 2001.
3. M.Ibnkahla, “Signal Processing for Mobile Communications”, CRC Press, 2005.
4. A.V.H. Sheikh, “Wireless Communications Theory & Techniques”, Kluwer Academic
Publications, 2004.
5. A. Paulraj Arogyaswami, R. Nabar, and D.Gore, ”Introduction to Space-time Wireless
Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
6. Recent literature in Advanced Techniques for Wireless Reception.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Discuss the Wireless signaling environment and Performance issues.
CO2 Analyze the channel modeling and multiuser detection.
CO3 Analyze the Adaptive array processing and turbo coded CDMA.
CO4 Analyze Linear and nonlinear predictive techniques.
CO5 Analyze the Signal Processing Techniques for wireless reception.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 208 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO32

Course Title : Error Control Coding
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites :
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To explain the importance of modern coding techniques in the design of digital
communication systems.

Course Content

Review of modern algebra. Galois fields. Linear block codes; encoding and decoding. Cyclic codes.
Non-binary codes.

Convolutional codes. Generator sequences. Structural properties. ML decoding. Viterbi decoding.

Sequential decoding.

Modulation codes. Trellis coded modulation. Lattice type Trellis codes. Geometrically uniform
trellis codes. Decoding of modulation codes.

Turbo codes. Turbo decoder. Interleaver. Turbo decoder. MAP and log MAP decoders. Iterative
turbo decoding. Optimum decoding of turbo codes.

Space-time codes. MIMO systems. Space-time codes. MIMO systems. Space-time block codes
(STBC) – decoding of STBC.

References
1. S.Lin & D.J.Costello, “Error Control Coding (2/e)”, Pearson, 2005.
2. B.Vucetic & J.Yuan, “Turbo codes”, Kluwer, 2000
3. C.B.Schlegel & L.C.Perez, “Trellis and Turbo Coding”, Wiley,2004.
4. B.Vucetic & J.yuan, “Space-Time Coding”, Wiley, 2003.
5. R.Johannaesson & K.S.Zigangirov, “Fundamentals of Convolutional Coding”, Universities
Press, 2001.
6. Recent literature in Error Control Coding.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Understand the need for error correcting codes in data communication and storage
systems.
CO2 Identify the major classes of error detecting and error correcting codes and how they
are used in practice. Construct codes capable of correcting a specified number of
errors.
CO3 Use the mathematical tools for designing error correcting codes, including finite fields.
CO4 Explain the operating principles of block codes, cyclic codes, convolution codes,
modulation codes, Turbo codes etc.
CO5 Design an error correcting code for a given application.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 209 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO33

Course Title : Digital Communication Receivers
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites :
Contact Hours : 3
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To expose the students to the latest trends in the design of digital communication
receivers with particular emphasis on synchronization, channel estimation and
signal processing aspects.

Course Content

Baseband PAM. Clock recovery circuits. Error tracking and spectral – line generating
synchronizers. Squaring and Mueller and Muller synchronizers.

Channel models. Receivers for PAM. Optimum ML receivers. Synchronized detection. Digital
matched filter.

ML synchronization algorithms – DD and NDA. Timing parameter and carrier phase estimation –
DD and NDA.

Performance analysis of carrier and symbol synchronizers. Feedback and feed forward
synchronizers. Cycle slipping Acquisition of carrier phase and symbol timing.

Fading channels. Statistical characterization. Flat and frequency selective fading channels.
Optimal receivers for data detection and synchronization parameter estimation. Realizable
receiver structures for synchronized detection.

References
1. H.Meyer , M. Moeneclaey, and S. A. Fechtel, “Digital Communication Receivers”, Wiley,
1998.
2. U.Mengali & A.N.D.Andrea, “Synchronization Techniques for Digital Receivers”, Kluwer ,
1997.
3. N.Benuveruto & G.Cherubini, “Algorithms for Communication Systems and their
Applications”, Wiley, 2002.
4. H.Meyer & G.Ascheid, “Synchronization in Digital Communications”, John Wiley, 1990.
5. Recent literature in Digital Communication Receivers.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 Summarize baseband PAM and Synchronizers.
CO2 Model and distinguish the channels.
CO3 Interpret optimum receivers and matched filter receivers.
CO4 Summarize phase and carrier estimation methods.
CO5 Compare carrier and symbol synchronizers.

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 210 | P a g e

 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli – 620 015

Course Code : ECHO34

Course Title : ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Type of Course : HO
Prerequisites : ECPC15
Contact Hours : 4
Course Assessment : Continuous Assessment, End Assessment
Methods

Course Learning Objectives (CLO)

CLO1 To provide rigorous foundations in discrete-time stochastic process, optimum filter,
adaptive filter, power spectrum estimation and frequency estimation.
Course Content
Discrete-Time Random Process: Random Process: Ensemble average, Gaussian processes,
Stationary process, autocovariance and autocorrelation matrices, ergodicity, white noise, power
spectrum. Filtering random processes. Spectral factorization. ARMA, AR and MA processes.
Harmonic processes. Linear mean square estimation. Parameter estimation Bias and consistency.

Optimum Linear filter and linear prediction: FIR Wiener filter. Orthogonality principle in
linear mean square estimation. IIR Wiener filter: Non-causal Wiener filter and causal Wiener
filter. Linear prediction. Forward and backward linear prediction. Levinson-Durbin algorithm.

Adaptive Filters: Adaptive filters. FIR adaptive filter. The steepest decent adaptive filter. LMS
algorithm. Convergence of adaptive algorithms. Normalized LMS algorithm. Adaptive noise
cancellation. Exponentially weighted RLS algorithm

Power Spectrum Estimation: Spectrum estimation. Estimation of autocorrelation. Periodogram

method. Performance of the periodogram. Nonparametric methods: Bartlett’s method, Welch
method and Blackman-Tukey method. Performance comparisons. Minimum variance spectrum
estimation. Parametric methods: AR spectrum estimation. Model parameter-Yule Walker
equations.

Frequency Estimation: Eigen analysis of autocorrelation matrix. Pisarenko Harmonic

Decomposition. MUSIC method. ESPRIT method. Minimum variance frequency estimation.
Propagator method.
References
1. M.H.Hayes,” Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John-Wiley, 2001.
2. S.Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory (4/e)”, Prentice- Hall, 2002.
3. D.G.Manolakis, V. K. Ingle, and S. M. Kogon ,”Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing”,
McGraw-Hill, 2005
4. S.L. Marple,”Digital Spectral Analysis”, 1987.
5. Recent literature in Advanced Digital Signal Processing.

Course Outcomes (CO)

At the end of the course student will be able
CO1 To understand and analyze discrete-time random processes and employ the concept of
stochastic processes to analyses linear systems
CO2 To select linear filtering and prediction techniques to engineering problems.
CO3 To describe the most important adaptive filter generic problems and various adaptive filter
algorithms.
CO4 To derive and analyses the statistical properties of the conventional spectral
estimators, nonparametric and parametric estimation method.
CO5 To select an appropriate array processing algorithm for frequency estimation

B.Tech./Electronics and Communication Engineering 211 | P a g e